JP7110688B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in an operation port provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state. Variable display is started. When the player wins the lottery, a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to raise the level of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the level of attention paid to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

Means for solving the above problems will be described below.

The present invention
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. In a game machine comprising a game turn control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that
The game round control means has period determination means for determining an operation period of the game round motion for each game round,
an effect executing means for executing an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is being performed;
A first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period are provided as effects executed by the effect execution means,
There is provided an upper limit number of times corresponding to the determination result by the grant determination means for the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed during one game round,
When the first predetermined effect is executed for at least the upper limit number of times, the effect executing means intervenes the second predetermined effect to perform the first predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect to be executed before the second predetermined effect. It is characterized by having means capable of making the player separately recognize the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect .

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a back pack unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a schematic diagram showing a right or wrong table. (a), (b) Schematic diagram showing a distribution table, (c) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by an MPU of a main control device; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. (a) A flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time, (b) a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for reach non-occurrence referenced in the low frequency support mode, (c) referenced in the high frequency support mode It is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for reach non-occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for starting fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special production modes. (a) A schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, (b) a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of pseudo-continuous-variation display; (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of a game effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation display, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the color of the effect and the degree of expectation for a big win. (a) A schematic diagram showing the display contents in the time saving production mode, (b) a timing chart showing the flow of the game production. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game production in the time-saving production mode. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation|holding notices performed by MPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing pending command setting processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit; (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the notice effect, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the variable display mode in each effect mode. (a) It is the flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing for special production|presentation modes performed by MPU of a notification / production|presentation control apparatus, (b) It is the flowchart which shows the special production|presentation setting processing for reach. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern setting processing for reach. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating a first special pattern table, (b) A schematic diagram illustrating a second special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of game production|presentation by a 1st special production|presentation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game effect by the second special effect pattern. It is a flow chart which shows special effect setting processing for complete failure. 4 is a flowchart showing first setting processing; (a) A schematic diagram illustrating a fifth special pattern table, (b) A schematic diagram illustrating a sixth special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production|presentation by a 5th special pattern and a 6th special pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing second setting processing; (a) A schematic diagram illustrating a ninth special pattern table, (b) A schematic diagram illustrating a tenth special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production|presentation by a 9th special pattern and a 10th special pattern. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a contrast; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between start timing of ready-to-win display and the number of parts in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the setting processing for cooperation performed by MPU of an information and production control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship of the game round before and after. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the fixed display time of the pattern and the stop display time of the pattern; (a) A flowchart showing standby display control processing executed by the MPU of the notification/production control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and availability of standby display. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of game round production. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the fixed display time of the pattern and the stop display time of the pattern;

<First embodiment>
A first form of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting a long frame material to four sides, and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame shape as a whole. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on an island facility or the like of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is constituted by these upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18, and the main part 12 of the game machine rotates to the outer frame 11 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. , and can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the tip of rotation (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a door frame 14 arranged behind the inner frame 13. A back pack unit 15 is provided. In addition, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base side and the right side as the rotation tip side in the front view of the game machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the game machine. there is

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. there is A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. It is closed from the rear side of the door frame 14.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23 . A partition portion is formed in the glass holder to partition the holding area of the glass panel 23 in the front and rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 doubly cover the game area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20 . Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, along the periphery of the window portion 21, an annular decorative portion 26 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. The annular illumination portion 26 lights up or flashes according to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, an error display lamp portion 27 is provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 at the center of the annular illumination portion 26, and lights up when a problem such as an error occurs. A prize ball lamp part 28 that lights up is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state are provided at positions close to the left and right winning ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3). In the speaker unit 29, the monotony of the game is suppressed by switching the BGM or the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to a game ball shooting mechanism described later. In addition, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing game balls that have become surplus in the upper plate 33 and a game ball that has not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls shot by the game ball shooting mechanism. It has a function as a receptacle for storing the ejected game balls when the balls are returned to the player.

A game ball shooting handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 32 so as to protrude forward. By operating the game ball shooting handle 41, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later. The shooting speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the game ball shooting handle 41 increases. It reaches the area PE. Further, by adjusting this operation amount by the player, it becomes possible to separate the hitting of the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . The passage forming unit 45 is molded of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 45, a receptacle projecting rearward and open upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the receptacle is divided into left and right by a partition wall to form the entrance of the front door side upper tray passage. A section and an entrance section of the front door side lower tray passage are partitioned. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section to be described later. A game ball entering the plate passage is guided to a lower plate 34. - 特許庁

Projection shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rear surface of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. FIG. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11 . The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11 . The inner frame base member 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11 , and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base member 50 . A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain board is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain board. It will be posted. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front face of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5). Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shafts, and by inserting bearings provided on the front door frame 14 into the shafts, the front door frame is attached to the inner frame 13 . 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50 . The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (vertical frame member to be described later), and front door hook members 76 are scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). have. Hook receiving members 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 on the inner frame base member 50 have slits for protruding to the front side of the inner frame 13 corresponding to the front door hook members 76 respectively. formed in this way. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with hook receiving members 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in one-to-one correspondence with the front door hook members 76, whereby the front door is opened. The frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has an inner frame hook member 77 (see FIG. 4) extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . The main part 12 of the game machine is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state by hooking these inner frame hook members 77 on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11 .

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75 ). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned left (counterclockwise). , and the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

A housing recess 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50 . The housing recess is recessed toward the rear of the game machine according to the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted into the housing recess 51 from the front of the game machine. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the housing recess 51 , and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (a rear block 80 b described later) protrudes rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52 . . It should be noted that almost the entire window hole 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50 .

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 includes a game area formation body 80a in which a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the front side, and a game area formation body 80a provided on the back side of the game area formation body 80a. device, movable performance mechanism, decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are integrated with the back block 80b in which the base body 251 is mounted. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side). The glass unit 22 is arranged so that the gap between the rear side glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE are arranged so as not to line up in front and back at the same location. This suppresses ball clogging in the game area PE.

The game board unit 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operating openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation holes 83a, 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry part, and the detection result is obtained. A privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (distribution of game balls) is given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the bottom of the game area formation body 80a, and game balls that have not entered various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out hole 89, the game ball entering the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b will be referred to as "winning". express.

Also, in the game area forming body 80a, a large number of nail members 93 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 94 are arranged. It is These nail members 93, windmills 94, etc., divide the game ball's downflow path, and are adjusted so that winning to the above-described general winning opening 81 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the game area forming body 80a. A variable display unit 252 belonging to the rear block 80b is positioned behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). there is In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, showing a state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible.

Activation openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. As shown in FIG. The operating ports 83a and 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a provided below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b provided immediately below the upper operating port 83a. The (lottery trigger ball entry portion) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit for driving the movable piece. By changing the position of the movable piece by the drive unit, the ball enters the lower operation opening 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (assisted state) in which it is possible and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which it is impossible to enter the same ball. It should be noted that it is sufficient that it is more difficult to enter a ball in the closed state of the electric accessory 91 than in the open state, and it is not necessary to prohibit the entry of a ball.

In the game area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position upstream of the lower operation opening 83b (specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 252), and the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is used as a trigger. If the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper working port 83a, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 83b, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 83b over the upper working port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 83b larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening that leads to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening/closing member (opening/closing member) that opens and closes the large winning opening. means) is provided. The open/close door can be switched between an open state (assisted state) in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which the game ball cannot be entered. In addition, the opening and closing door is connected to a variable prize winning driving unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a. In the case of winning the transition to the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution state) (jackpot: when the result is a transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state) so that it can be switched to the open state It has become. Regarding the closed state of the open/close door, it is sufficient if it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state, and it is not necessary to prohibit the entry of the ball.

The open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. As for the mode of opening the variable winning device 82 in the opening/closing execution mode, for example, a plurality of rounds (eg 4, 8, 16 rounds), where one round is the lapse of a predetermined time (eg 30 sec) or a predetermined number of winnings (eg 10). is set so that the opening of the open/close door is repeated.

Here, a supplementary description of the variable display unit 252 will be given. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays (variably displays) symbols triggered by the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b. The pattern display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a big win is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (symbol combination) is stopped and displayed on a preset activated line, and the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or big win) is entered. . The pattern display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device.

A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 80a so as to surround the central opening 85. As shown in FIG. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate) from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game area forming body 80a. , the clearance between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the pattern display device 253, and the flowing path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into a route that bypasses from the left side and a route that bypasses from the left side.

A stage portion is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95 so that the game ball can roll left and right. Game balls that flow in from inlets formed in the left and right frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through warp passages also formed in the center frame 95 . The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that reaches the stage portion relatively easily flows into the upper operation port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. contributes to In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered with the transparent opening cover 86, and the game ball reaching the stage portion is regulated so as not to move toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252). It is

The operation openings 83a and 83b are arranged at positions close to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since the transition to the special game state can be triggered by the winning of the operation ports 83a, 83b, the player pays attention to whether the operation ports 83a, 83b win or not, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is focused on the pattern display device 253 . The actuation openings 83a and 83b are provided near the variable display unit 252 as a means of concentrating on the periphery of the variable display unit 252 where the player wants to pay attention.

A game area partitioning member 99 that partitions and forms the game area PE together with a guide rail 100, which will be described later, is arranged at the right end of the game area forming body 80a (rotating tip of the game board unit 80, which will be described later). The game area partitioning member 99 is provided with a stopper member against which game balls flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member is weakened and then flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force reducing function for weakening the force of the game ball that collides with it.

Here, a supplementary description of the main display unit 87 will be given. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partitioning member 99 , and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22 . A main display portion D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the content displayed on the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display portion D includes an upper operation opening display portion UD for displaying the lottery result based on the prize winning in the upper operation opening 83a, and a lower operation opening display portion UD for displaying the lottery result based on the prize winning in the lower operation opening 83b. and a mouth display part LD. In the upper working port display unit UD, the winning of the upper working port 83a triggers the variable display of the pattern. The result of is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the display unit for the upper operation port stops the variable display, and the stop result is a predetermined result. is displayed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the display unit LD for the lower working port, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower working port 83b as a trigger, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower working port 83b. The result of is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the lower operating port 83b is the winning result corresponding to the big win, the variable display is stopped in the lower operating port display section LD, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is entered according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any one of the operation openings 83a, 83b, the corresponding operation opening display portions UD, LD start the variable display, and after the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, Until a predetermined stop display time (fixed display time) elapses while the pattern is stopped and displayed (until the fixed display ends) corresponds to one game cycle. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is won in any of the operation openings 83a and 83b, the single display area is displayed. In the configuration where the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and after the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed, until the fixed display is completed. can be set to be one of the game rounds. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to start the variable display of patterns on the display portions UD and UL for the operation openings 83a and 83b when an internal lottery based on the winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b is executed. It is also possible to start the internal lottery based on winnings before the internal lottery is executed.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through-gate display section for displaying the lottery result based on the winning of the through-gate 84 . In the through-gate display unit, the winning of the through-gate 84 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 84 is clearly indicated. be done. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric duty open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is not performed. After being stopped, it shifts to the power release state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower operation opening 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 84 is retained up to four times at maximum. A pending number display is provided.

The main display portion D described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and movement of game balls in front of the main display portion D is avoided. The visibility is guaranteed.

Referring again to FIG. 5, the structure of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is shot into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41. A game ball shooting mechanism 110 for shooting is provided.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. A ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50 .

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game area forming body 80a. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed in the launch rail 112, and a game ball is fitted in the groove portion so that the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined.

At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is arranged to stop the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply/shooting control device, the game ball placed at the shooting standby position moves to the side of the game area forming body 80a. is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100 partitions the game area PE together with the game area partitioning member 99 fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. there is In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104→the exit portion 105). In addition, in the game area forming body 80a, on the front side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, in the vicinity of the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning into the guide passage 103. is attached to suppress the following game ball from being hindered by the game ball reaching the game area PE first.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 that constitute the guide rail 100 has an arcuate shape about the center of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102 due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. In other words, when the game ball is launched so as to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide path 103 constitutes a passage area (passage route) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is substantially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other obliquely across the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a. are placed in In other words, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally shifted near the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a, while a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112. As shown in FIG.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return in the guide path 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball path through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage communicates with the front door side lower tray passage, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled singly during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time, the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member mounted in consideration of such circumstances, and has a protective function to prevent the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the factors described above.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the . The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123 . The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. In addition, below the passage forming member 121, the socket portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper plate passage 122, the front door side upper plate passage is arranged, A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123 .

Below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50, an opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is urged to a front position to close the upper tray passage 122 and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side. By being in the closed state, game balls are prevented from falling out of the passages 122 and 123.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the open/close member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and further, the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8). Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. A plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, the bottom portion of the accommodation recess (game board accommodation portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 is penetrated in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51 . Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (back block 80 b ), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 52 . Here, the configuration of the rear surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 opened to the side of the game area forming body 80a, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back side of the game area forming body 80a to form a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 serves as an arrangement area for a movable performance mechanism, decorative members capable of emitting light, etc., and the rear side thereof serves as a control device for controlling these various configurations and the variable display unit 252 (a pattern display device). 253).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-described pattern display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and its pattern display device are attached to the protruding portion. A display controller for driving H.253 is attached. The pattern display device 253 and the display control device are stacked in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the pattern display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side. Further, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear surface of the base body 251 so as to be positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/effect control device 140 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the output of sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification/effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a board box 141 made of resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/production control device 140 so as to cover the base body 96 from behind. The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mount 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main controller 162 mounted on the mount 161. there is The main control device 162 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 163 made of the like.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are combined in an unopenable manner. The base and box cover are adapted to be unopenably joined. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after the package has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164 . When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the circuit board box 163 body is opened. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a pedestal sealing portion 165 . More specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has locking holes and locking pins in the same manner as the box sealing portion 164 . The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. As a result, when the board box 163 is illegally removed, the fact can be easily grasped.

In the front part of the base body 251, the part facing the lower back surface of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation openings 83a and 83b, and downstream. A collection passage (not shown) is formed to gather at one place on the side. As a result, all the winning game balls such as the general winning opening 81 are gathered under the game board unit 80 through the recovery path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls collected under the game board unit 80 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage. It should be noted that the out port 89 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the prize winning ports are drawn out into the discharge passage through the out port 89 .

Further, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b includes, as detection sensors for the respective ball entry portions described above, a detection sensor for a general prize winning opening for detecting a game ball that has entered the general prize winning opening 81, and an operation opening 83a. , 83b, and a detection sensor for an operation port for detecting a game ball that has entered 83b. These various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162 , and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main controller 162 .

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by a back pack unit 15. As shown in FIG. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15. To the back pack 201, a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board, and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 10, has a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion protruding to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 212. The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211 . Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal plate 213, and a wiring WH1 connecting a management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal plate 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, etc. based on these various signals. It is configured to be understood.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at the right end as seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking pins 214 are provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting it through the portion 133 . The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact.

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail 222 gently sloping downstream is connected to the side of the tank 221 , and a vertically extending case rail 223 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222 . A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution portion 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224 .

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage. It is

At the lower end of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and control device collective unit 204 is attached so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241 on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state return switch 245 clears the ball clogging.

The power/fire control device 243 has a power/fire control board housed in a board box 246 . The power supply/shooting control board generates and outputs a predetermined power supply required by various control devices, etc., and further controls the launching of game balls accompanying the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41 by the player. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball shooting mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

A power switch 247 is provided in the power/launch control device 243 . By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cut off state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, and even in the event of a power failure, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure. It is possible. For example, when the power supply is cut off according to a normal procedure such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored and held. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the game machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the game machine to expose the rear part of the inner frame 13. FIG. On the other hand, when the locking device 75 restricts the opening of the game machine main section 12, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine. In other words, the various switches described above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the game machine is closed. making it difficult.

(Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the blocks in FIG.

An MPU 402 is mounted on a main control board 401 provided in the main controller 162 . The MPU 402 is a ROM 403 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 402, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403. It is an element containing a RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the functions of the ROM 403 and the functions of the RAM 404 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 242, various detection sensors, and the like. A power supply/emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405 , and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405 .

As part of the various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects the entry of a ball (winning a prize) into the general prize winning opening 81, a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects the entry of a ball (winning a prize) into the variable prize winning device 82, and an upper operation. A ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects a ball entering the opening 83a (winning a prize), a ball entering detection sensor 391d that detects a ball entering the lower operating opening 83b (winning a prize), and a ball entering the through gate 84 (winning a prize) are detected. The MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 makes a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. Further, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and executes a support generating lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84. - 特許庁

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242 and a notification/production control device 140. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding ball entering portion such as the operation ports 83a and 83b described above, for example. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 game balls are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the upper operation port 83a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and the winning to the lower operation port 83b is output. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output from the main controller 162 to the notification/production control device 140 . In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning driving unit that opens and closes the opening/closing body (for example, the shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b, and A main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the MPU 402 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving unit so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, display control of the main display portion D of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 402 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the game hall side management control device (hall computer HC). Information about lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This enables the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, and the like.

The blackout monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power/launch control device 243, and the blackout monitoring board 405 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 243. is provided with the ability to monitor The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., generate the necessary operating power for each, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. The power/shooting control device 243 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The notification/effect control device 140 is provided with a notification/effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM. A RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not an essential configuration that the ROM and the RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and they may be individually integrated into chips. The MPU of the notification/production control device 140 drives and controls the lamp portions 26 to 28 and the speaker portion 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and the display control device 410 is controlled.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 based on the command input from the notification/effect control device 140 . In this case, in the notification/effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the pattern display device 253 fluctuates the display mode of the pattern (for example, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the content of the ready-to-win effect, etc.) and the pattern (the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbols of each game cycle and the contents of the same variable display will be described. 12 and 13 will be referred to as necessary in the following description. 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the contents displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.
For convenience of explanation, illustration of a background image and the like displayed on the display screen 253a is omitted.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of 9 types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 12(a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers. (see FIG. 12(j)) are stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. On the display screen 253a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 253a is designed so that 3 symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are displayed stopped. It is designed to be Five effective lines are set on the display screen 253a, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination with the same number) is formed on one of the activated lines. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a big win moving image is displayed as a normal big win result or a probability variable big win result.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called a third pattern row (or a third pattern row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are assigned. The main pattern corresponds to the "non-specific pattern". In the event of a probability variable jackpot result, for example, the same specified symbol combination or the same non-specified symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 253 is not limited to the one described above and may be arbitrarily selected. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction.

At the bottom of the display screen 253a, more specifically, below the variable display area ME composed of the variable display area for the upper symbol row, the variable display area for the middle symbol row, and the variable display area for the lower symbol row, there is a pending display. area is set. The reserved display area is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit reserved display areas as the maximum reserved number when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 83a are arranged in the left and right direction, and the same number as the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 83a. The holding number display area Da for the upper operation opening which can display the image for holding in the unit display area, and the unit holding display area of the same number as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 83b are arranged in the horizontal direction. Execution is performed in the holding number display area Db for the lower working opening, which is partitioned and displayed in the same manner as the holding information related to the lower working opening 83b and the same number of holding images can be displayed in the unit display areas, and the variable display area ME. and an execution target display area capable of displaying a holding image corresponding to the middle game round.

More specifically, the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 83a is 4, correspondingly, in the reservation number display area Da for the upper operation opening, the first unit reservation display area, A second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area are set. In addition, when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 83b, the maximum number of reservations is four. A unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area are set.

For example, when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 83a and the number of reservations is 1, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area, and the game ball enters the upper operation opening 83a. When the number of pending prizes is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area to the fourth unit pending display area. FIG. 11(b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved pieces in the upper working port 83a is three and the number of reserved pieces in the lower working port 83b is two. In the following description, the "holding number" is also simply referred to as the "holding number".

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 402 uses various counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, the setting of the display of the main display unit 87 (main display section D), the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 253, and the like. , As shown in FIG. 14, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, a winning type counter C2 used for determining the type of the big win such as the result of the variable jackpot or the result of the normal jackpot, and the pattern display device 253. A reach random number counter C3 used for a reach lottery when fluctuations occur, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and patterns in the display parts UD and LD for the operation port of the main display unit 87. A variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time and the variation display time of the symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (effect execution time including the temporary stop time described later) is used. Further, an electric accessory open counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404 . The RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an upper working opening reservation area Ra, a lower working opening reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area.

The reserved ball storage area 432 includes a reserved area consisting of an upper working opening reservation area Ra and a lower working opening reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE. Each reservation area Ra, Rb has a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in is stored in one of the first area to the fourth area as the aforementioned reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the upper working port 83a or the lower working port 83b occurs multiple times in succession, the first area → second area → third area → fourth area Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of area. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operation opening 83a or the lower operation opening 83b are reserved and stored. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 432, and in the total reservation number storage area, the number of holding and storing the winning history to the upper operation opening 83a or the lower operation opening 83b is specified. Information for doing is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area when starting the variable display of the pattern on the display portions UD and LD for the operation port of the main display unit 87. , at the start of one game round, winning/failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a, and the lower working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 83b. stored in

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 421 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 403 . As shown in FIG. 15, as the right/wrong table, a right/wrong table for low-probability mode (low-probability right/wrong information group) and a right/wrong table for high-probability mode (high-probability right/wrong information group) are set. . That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) is referred to in the lottery, the values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot (that is, winning information) are "7" and "307". , "507". That is, "7", "307", and "507" among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 599" correspond to the big winning result. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot is "7", " 36", "107", "307" . . . "407", "507". It is 30 of "598". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 599, ``7'', ``36'', ``107'', ``307'' ... ``407'', ``507'', ``598'' correspond to the jackpot result ing. Incidentally, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result will be a wrong result except for the value of the random number that will win the jackpot.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are differentiated in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 91 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

As a support mode by the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b, when compared with the situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric role of the lower operating port 83b A low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) is set.

Specifically, in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role product opening lottery using the electric role product opening counter C4 is the same, but the high frequency In the support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state when winning the electric role open state is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It is

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operation opening 83b is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working opening 83a is higher than the lower working opening 83b, but in the high-frequency supporting mode, the lower working opening 83b is more likely to be won than the upper working opening 83a. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation opening 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. be able to.

In addition, the specific configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electrical open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in the lottery is increased. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by changing any one of the number of times, the opening time, and the probability of winning, or an arbitrary combination of conditions.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working port 83a or the lower working port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a, and the lower working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 83b. stored in

The distribution destination of the game result for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 422 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403 . Here, the contents of the allocation table will be explained using the schematic diagram of FIG. 16 . The distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the upper working port shown in FIG. 16(a) and a distribution table (second distribution information group) for the lower working port shown in FIG. minute information group) is set.

In the distribution table for the upper working port, the game results are distributed as 8R probability variable jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R normal jackpot results (low probability special game results), 4R probability variable jackpot results (high probability corresponding game result) and 4R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and "9 to 14 ” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “15 to 23” corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, and “24 to 29” corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower working port, the game results are distributed as 16R variable jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R variable jackpot results (high probability special game results), 8R normal jackpot results (low special game result corresponding to probability), 4R variable probability jackpot result (game result corresponding to high probability), and 4R normal jackpot result (game result corresponding to low probability) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower opening, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and "6 to 11 ” corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot result, “12 to 17” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “18 to 23” corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, “24 to 29” is 4R usually corresponds to the jackpot result.

The 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and the 4R probability variable jackpot result are the jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As shown in FIG. 16(c), this high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win results, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, as shown in FIG. 16(c), in this high frequency support mode, when the number of games executed during the high frequency support mode reaches the end reference number of times or before reaching the end reference number of times, the result of the jackpot is determined. When it becomes (more specifically, when the open/close execution mode is started), the operation ends, and the low-frequency support mode is entered. As for the end reference number of times, any one of 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times is set. In the present embodiment, by hiding the end timing of the high-frequency support mode by not specifying the end reference count, it is difficult to identify how long the high-frequency support mode continues. This is a device for suppressing the monotony of the game in the high-frequency support mode.

By the way, part of the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained as described above, the same symbol combination as the normal jackpot result is displayed on the display screen 253a at the final stop (confirmed display), and it is possible to identify whether it has become normal or probability variation. designed to be difficult. However, when the high-frequency support mode continues over 100 times, it becomes clear from the behavior of the electric accessory 91 that the high-frequency support mode based on the probability variable jackpot result is in progress.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 83a, and the lower working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 83b. stored in Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403 .

However, in the game round in which the open/close execution mode is entered, the MPU 402 determines whether or not to generate reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the game results are displayed in the open/close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display can be the special display result in the game turn resulting in the game result, the stop display result after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 253. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display before being derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode. It is a display state in which a possible ready-to-win pattern combination is displayed, and in that state, patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining pattern rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to terminating the variable display of symbols, a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode can be established on a preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying a combination of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

The contents displayed on the display screen 253a will be described in more detail. First, when the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row is finished, and further, when the variable display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row, the player hits one of the activated lines and the symbol combination is completed. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the numbers that make up the reach line, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row to change the reach display. becomes. When a big win occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols attached with the numbers forming the combination of the winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line so that the symbols in the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the ready-to-win symbol combination is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , or by reducing or hiding the ready-to-win pattern combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a to perform a ready-to-win effect. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS indicates, in the MPU 402, the variation display time in the upper and lower operation port display portions of the main display unit 87 (main display portion D) and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253. Used in making decisions. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the display unit for the upper operation port and the display unit for the lower operation port and at the start of the variation of the pattern by the pattern display device 253 .

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to open state.

As already explained, in the MPU 402, at least the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the variable display time in the display section for the upper working port and the display section for the lower working port. A variable display time table storage area 423 is used. Also, in the MPU 402, using the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the stop result in the upper working opening display section and the lower working opening display section is determined. However, the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is used for the determination.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed when the game is progressed by the MPU 402 in the main controller 162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 402 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , the description of these various processes is omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404 .

In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are incremented by 1, respectively, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM404.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 84 is executed. In the win-through processing, it is determined whether or not a prize-winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. On the condition that the number of stored accessory pending memories is less than 4, the value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electrical role pending area. Then, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning processing for the through gate is ended.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the working openings accompanying the winning of the working openings 83a and 83b is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

(Winning process for working opening)
Here, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won a prize) into the upper working opening 83a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operation opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the subsequent step S203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the upper working hole 83a. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the upper working hole 83a. In the following step S204, the value corresponding to the upper working port 83a is read out from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set as the starting reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the reserved area Ra (hereinafter referred to as the upper working port reserved memory). number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, etc. is performed, and the winning processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operation opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won) the lower operation opening 83b. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S207, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls is set. Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S207 are transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing described later.

In subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side, information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the lower opening 83b. In the following step S209, the value corresponding to the lower working port 83b is read out from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set as the starting reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the reserved area Rb (hereinafter referred to as the lower working port reserved memory). number RbN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, etc. is performed, and the winning processing ends.

Note that if both the processing in steps S201 and S206 result in a negative determination, that is, if there is no ball hit in either the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b, the winning process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the operation suspension storage number N stored in the suspension number storage area of the storage ball storage area 432, specifically, the trigger for the information acquisition process among the upper operation opening 83a and the lower operation opening 83b It is determined whether or not the number N of operation pending memories (RaN or RbN) related to the ball-entering portion that has become is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number N of operation pending memories is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and when it is less than the upper limit value, the number N of operation pending memories of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S302. , the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as the common number of reservations CRN) stored in the number of reservations storage area in step S303 is incremented by one.

In the following step S304, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the free storage area of the reservation area RE for the operation port. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common pending number CRN incremented by one in step S302.

In other words, when the start suspension memory number RaN for the upper working port is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103. is stored in the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the upper working port reservation area Ra, ie, the starting reservation memory number RaN for the upper working port incremented by one in step S302 and the corresponding reservation area Ra.

Further, when the start suspension memory number RbN for the lower working port is set, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is set to the lower working port The starting reserve memory number RbN for the lower working port incremented by one in step S302 is stored in the reserve area Rb corresponding to the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the reserve area Rb for the lower work port.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, display update processing is executed for the pending number display portion of the main display unit 87. FIG. In the display update processing, when the current ball entry (winning destination) is the upper operation opening 83a, the display of the pending number display section for the upper opening is updated, and the current ball entry (winning destination) is operated downward. In the case of the port 83b, the display of the reserved number display section for the lower working port is updated.

Each holding number display unit is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in the holding number display unit and the number of holdings related to the upper working port 83a and the number of holdings related to the lower working port 83b It has a matching configuration. When the number of reservations related to the upper operation opening 83a increases due to the winning this time, the number of LEDs lit in the reservation number display unit for the upper operation opening is increased accordingly, and the lower operation opening 83b When the number of reservations increases, processing is performed to increase the number of LEDs lit in the number-of-holds display section for the lower opening accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), recognize that the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b has occurred, and the suspension described later is performed. Confirmation processing for pending notice and processing for setting pending commands, which are processing for executing the notice, are executed, and this information acquisition processing ends. In addition, the hold command includes information as to which one of the upper operation opening 83a and the lower operation opening 83b is based on winning a prize.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process of step S307 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242 . In addition, when various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, and other production commands, a hold command, and a shift command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the notification / production control device 140. .

In addition, although the details will be described later, for example, every time the variable display of the pattern is completed in the operation port display portions UD and LD of the main display portion D, an external signal indicating determination of the pattern is output to the hall computer HC to execute opening and closing. During the mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer HC, and if in the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer HC. do.

Next, in step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404 .

In the following step S403, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control processing, big hit determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S403, it progresses to step S404 and executes a game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this game state transition processing. Details of the game round control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower working opening 83b is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404 is used to determine whether or not the electric role product 91 is placed in the open state. A lottery is carried out, and opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 91 is executed when the electric role open state is won. In addition, display control of the through-gate display section in the main display section D is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the power opening lottery.

As already explained, as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this processing, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won, and one time Set a longer open time. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric accessory 91 is won and the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after the end of one open state. Set so that the closing time up to is shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 .

Thereafter, in step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, on the condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power/shooting control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is activated once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec). to excite the As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404 . Also, in step S409, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404 .

Since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process fluctuates without being constant. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control processing of step S403 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 24 and the like.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 are not executed. End the control process.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display portions UD and LD for operating openings of the main display unit 87 are performing variable display or fixed display. If it is not during the game round, the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505. In the game round start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of start-up reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". When the common reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 . Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S504 data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 for variable display, Furthermore, in step S505, after performing the variation start processing for starting the variation display of the display portion for the actuation opening in the main display unit 87 and the variation display of the pattern display device 253, this game turn control processing is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, of the operation pending storage numbers N stored in the pending number storage area, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common pending number CRN are decremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reservation information reserved and stored in the lower opening reservation area Rb (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation reservation memory number N (lower opening opening reservation storage number RbN) is "0". do. If the number of reserved memories for the lower opening RbN is "0", data setting processing related to the display unit for the upper opening UD is executed. A data setting process relating to the operating aperture display unit LD is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number RbN of reserved storage for the lower working opening is "0". When the information is stored, the number of reserved information reserved and stored in the upper working opening reservation area Ra (see FIG. 14), that is, the working reserved memory number N (the upper working opening reserved memory number RaN) is Regardless of whether or not the number is 1 or more, the data stored in the lower working port reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display. That is, in step S602, when the reservation information is stored in both the upper operation port reservation area Ra and the lower operation port reservation area Rb, priority is given to the reservation information corresponding to the lower operation port 83b. becomes.

In the following step S603, the data stored in the first to fourth areas for one of the upper opening reservation area Ra and the lower opening reservation area Rb in which the data moved to the execution area AE is stored. are shifted to the lower area side in order. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, the data in each area is changed from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Data is shifted.

In subsequent step S604, a shift command, which is information for making the notification/production control device 140 recognize that the data of the reserved areas Ra and Rb has been shifted, is set. After that, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set at step S604 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Then, this shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification/effect control device 140 .

(Variation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, a success/failure judgment process for judging whether or not the reservation information referred to in the fluctuation start process of this time corresponds to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for judging the big win, that is, the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the grasped information corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning/failing table for the high-probability mode stored in the winning/failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the grasped information is used as a jackpot. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to the winning of the jackpot. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, a type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, by referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, it is specified whether or not the grasped information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to the ball entering the upper working port 83a, the distribution table for the upper working port 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower working port 83b. If so, the sorting table for the lower working port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In the following step S704, based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703, whether or not the type of the current jackpot election is the probability variation jackpot result (16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result) judge. In the case of the probability variable jackpot result, stop result setting processing for the probability variable jackpot is executed in step S705, and in the case of not the probability variable jackpot result, the stop result setting processing for the normal jackpot is executed in step S706. If it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S707 stop result setting processing for the time of loss is executed.

Incidentally, the probability variable jackpot result is roughly divided into 16R probability variable jackpot result, 8R probability variable jackpot result, and 4R probability variable jackpot result. In the process of step S705, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result setting processing corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 8R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result setting processing corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot result is performed. In the case of the 4R probability variable jackpot result, the setting processing of the stop result corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is performed. Also, the normal jackpot results are roughly divided into 8R normal jackpot results and 4R normal jackpot results. In the process of step S706, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 4R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed. conduct.

In each of the stop result setting processes of steps S705 to S707, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is referred to for the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. and the specified information is stored in the RAM 404 . Also, in steps S705 and S706, the information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S705, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 4R probability variable jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, one of the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S708.

(Processing for setting variable display time)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24A, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 4R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. .

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss result, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of the reach indication. The reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to when specifying the presence or absence of the reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, and the variable display time table for reach generation stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referred to for this time. Variation display time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S804, the variation display time information is stored in the variation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. ) to the variable display time counter. After that, the setting process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the same lottery is a losing result and the lottery for the occurrence of the reach is won, the reach display is executed. ing.

Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display (more specifically, normal reach A to B) and a super reach display (more specifically, super reach A to C). Variable display time information corresponding to each normal reach display and super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. is obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A corresponding reach indication is determined.

In more detail, the variable display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of the probability variable jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the specific pattern combination can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the normal jackpot result, the non-specific pattern combination can be stopped and displayed. Variable display time is set.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 is referred to in step S805, and the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained, and in step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter in the variable display time counter area. After that, the setting process is terminated.

The variable display time when reach does not occur is set to be shorter as the number of stored hold information (common hold number CRN) increases. Specifically, in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table referred to during the low frequency support mode, when the number of pending information stored (number of pending) is "4", 1 sec, "3" , 5 sec or 7 sec for "2", 11 sec or 13 sec for "1", and 15 sec or 17 sec for "0" (Fig. 24 ( b) see). On the other hand, in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table referenced during the high-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information stored (holding number) is "2" to "4", 1 sec or 5 sec, 2 sec or 5 sec for "1", and 5 sec or 8 sec for "0" (see FIG. 24(c)).

In the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of entering a ball into the lower operation opening 83b is increased by the support by the electric accessory 91, and if the game ball is shot to the right route, the number of pending information related to the lower operation opening 83b will change approximately from "2" to "4". On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the pending information relating to the upper working port 83a is the main, and the number of pending information changes approximately from "0" to "3". As a result, the progress of the game in the high-frequency support mode is differentiated so as to be faster than the progress of the game in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode, the final display time of the pattern is 2 seconds, while in the high-frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the pattern is set to 1 second. shortened. As a result, further speeding up of the progress of the game is realized.

When comparing the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence corresponding to low frequency support mode and the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence corresponding to high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time in high frequency support mode is overall is set to be as short as In addition, when the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence corresponding to the high frequency support mode is referred to, 5 sec at a predetermined ratio (5% in this embodiment) in any case of the number of pending is set. This is a device to suppress the excessive speeding up and monotony of the game progress in the high-frequency support mode, and using this variable display time, the pattern display device 253 has a branch effect (not compatible with ready-to-win display development), which will be described later. will be executed.

Incidentally, the configuration for setting the variable display time is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of common reservations CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of common reservations CRN, the shorter the variable display time. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. Although the occurrence variable display time table is set, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the occurrence of the ready-to-win, and the variable display time to be easily selected and the variable display time to be difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the winning is reached. may be configured. Also, the variable display time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable display time table for normal jackpot, the variable display time table for loss reach, and the variable display time table for complete loss may be individually set.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S708, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set in step S709. The variable start command includes information on presence/absence of reach occurrence and information on variable display time. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, 16R probability variable jackpot result information, 8R probability variable jackpot result information, 4R probability variable jackpot result information, 8R normal jackpot result information, 4R normal jackpot result information, and out result. including information on

The variation start command and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp part 26 and the output pattern of the sound from the speaker part 29 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and determines the content of the determined effect. is executed, the lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled. In addition, the notification/production control device 140 determines the details of the game production such as the fluctuation display pattern of the symbols on the pattern display device 253 in the game round based on the received variation start command and the type command, and determines the details of the game production. The information is added to the variation start command and the type command and transmitted to the display control device 410 . The display control device 410 displays the pattern display device 253 so that the game effect (display effect) is executed in the mode determined by the notification/effect control device 140 based on the received variation start command and type command. Control.

After that, in step S710, after the fluctuation display of the pattern is started on the corresponding one of the upper working port display portion UD and the lower working port display portion LD of the main display unit 87, this fluctuation start processing is finished. . It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of patterns and the like is started before the lottery is executed.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 21), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progressing process, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) provided in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 404 has become "0". This value is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24), as described above. Also, this set value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 17) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, the display mode in the corresponding one of the upper working port display portion UD and the lower working port display portion LD of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S508. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 404 in any of the processes of steps S705 to S707 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the upper opening display section UD and the lower opening display section LD. The corresponding operating port display section is controlled so that the corresponding one of them is displayed as being stopped (determined display).

In the subsequent step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S509 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/production control device 140 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 410 receives the variation end command to confirm and display (final stop display) the final stop symbol combination in the game round.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which one game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the end of the variable display in either of the operation opening display portions UD and LD of the main display portion D. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, in which it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round (result of the lottery) corresponds to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 4R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. do. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S904. By the start processing, the operation regulation of the variable winning device 82 by the locking device is released, and the opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is allowed until the opening/closing execution mode is completed. Also, in the start processing of step S904, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the output of an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is started to the hall computer HC of the game hall. In step S901, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress based on the presence or absence of the open/close execution mode flag.

In the subsequent step S905, any one of "4", "8" and "16" is set in the open number counter OC provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. FIG. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the open number counter OC is set to "16", and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 When the 8R normal jackpot flag is stored, the open number counter OC is set to "8", and when the 4R variable probability jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, it is opened. Set the number counter OC to "4". The opening number counter OC functions as means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 has been opened. After executing the process of step S905, the process advances to step S506 to set an opening command.

The set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 253, and the determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/production control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the pattern display device 253 is executed so that the moving image display of the character, etc., and the switching of the background image, etc. are performed. After executing the process of step S906, the game state transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S908.

In the big winning opening opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving section of the variable winning device 82 . When the big winning opening is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "0". If the value of the opening number counter OC is "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". The open timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when ascertaining the opening period and closing period (interval period) of the big winning opening, and its value becomes "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is executed. decremented one by one. When the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0", the opening processing of the big winning opening is executed. Specifically, the variable winning driving unit is brought into a driving state so as to open the big winning opening. After that, the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) is performed. Specifically, the open timer counter TC is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and the winning counter PC is set to "10". After executing this setting process, an opening command indicating that the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) has been opened is set, and the main winning opening opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the reception of the opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". When the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined based on the detection signal from the ball entry detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable prize winning device 82 whether or not the game ball has won the prize winning opening. If no prize has been won, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When a prize has been won, output processing of a prize command is executed. The winning command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification/effect control device 140 . The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a preset number of game balls based on the receipt of the winning command. In the notification/effect control device 140, when a winning command is issued during the opening/closing execution mode, processing for changing the effect during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, is performed in order to teach the winning. conduct.

After executing the command output process, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". End the open/close process. When the value of the prize winning counter PC is "0" or when it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", it means that the conditions for closing the big prize winning opening are met. In this case, the variable winning driving section is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening.

Subsequently, update processing of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is Keep the value of '0'. After that, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the open number counter OC is "0".

When it is determined that the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open timer counter TC is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 sec), and after setting the closing command, the main winning opening opening/closing process is performed. exit. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). When receiving the closing command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the open number counter is "0", the ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 .

After that, after setting the ending command, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S908, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter OC is "0" in step S909. At S910, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the open number counter OC is "0" and the standby time for ending has passed, then in step S911, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any of the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and the 4R probability variable jackpot result. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 4R probability variable jackpot flag are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 .

If the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, or the 4R probability variable jackpot result, the flag related to the shift of the game state is erased. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the success/failure lottery in subsequent game rounds.

After that, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric support process, and the fluctuation display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and furthermore, the period of being in the open state by opening once is extended (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, that is, the 8R normal jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If there is, erase the flag associated with the transition of the game state. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric support process, and the fluctuation display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and furthermore, the period of being in the open state by opening once is extended (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the above-described probability variable jackpot result, the upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. Specifically, any one of "10", "20", 30", "50", and "100" is set in the number-of-games counter stored in the counter area 434 of the RAM 404. FIG. Regarding the 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result, 1/10 corresponds to the support number "10", 1/10 corresponds to the support number "20", and 1/10 corresponds to the support number " 30", 2/10 corresponds to the number of times of support "50", and 5/10 corresponds to the number of times of support "100". The high-frequency support mode is maintained until the number of games executed after the end of the open/close execution mode reaches the upper limit, and when the set upper limit is reached, the support mode switches from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Become. In the following description, this upper limit is also referred to as the end reference number of times.

After the game state setting process is performed, the opening/closing execution mode end process is executed in step S912, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In this ending process, the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the big win is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 26, a supplementary description will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410. FIG.

An MPU 442 is mounted on a notification/production control board 441 provided in the notification/production control device 140 . The MPU 442 includes a ROM 443 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443. A RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 442, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the above-described variation start command, type command and variation end command from the main control device 162. . Also, it receives pending display control commands (holding display control information) such as shift commands and pending commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 and the display control device 410, as already described. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 includes a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. It has It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 472, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/production control device 140 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically generates internal commands for VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game round in the pattern display device 253 based on the command transmitted from the notification/production control device 140, and draws to the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing result. Execute the process. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253 a of the pattern display device 253 .

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 474 .

The VDP 475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 253 . Since the VDP 475 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472 and the video RAM 477 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing various image data such as patterns, character images, and background images displayed on the pattern display device 253 . It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 .

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477, the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a is determined by the notification/production control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and the display is performed based on the result. The details of the presentation are determined by the display control device 410 . Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140, a variable display control process is executed as part of a regular process started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). An overview of the mode and the like are determined. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress. determine whether or not there is If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, this variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, this variable display control process is terminated after the process for starting variation is executed in step S1003.

Returning to the description of step S1001, when the affirmative determination is made in the step S1001, that is, when it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the variable display control process is terminated after the mid-variation process is executed in step S1005. The variation mid-process is a process of executing various effects, changing the determined effect, etc. in the game cycle started by the process for starting the variation.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process advances to step S1006, and after the fluctuation end processing is executed in step S1006, the fluctuation display control processing ends. In the process for ending the fluctuation, the variable display of symbols and the effect being executed are ended (final stop display or fixed display) so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game round. In this process, the driving control of the speaker section 29 and the lamp section 26 is performed to produce an effect corresponding to the definite stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, the process for ending the variation ends. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the design display device 253 to stop the design determination based on the received determination command.

(Processing for start of fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, a supplementary description of the fluctuation start processing in step S1003 will be given. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for a game turn based on receipt of a variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 .

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and the information on the occurrence of reach and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as already explained, when the variation start command is transmitted from the main controller 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read out, and game result information such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or loss result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S1101, from the specified information, information on the presence or absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence in the case of non-winning in the jackpot, and variable display time information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 442 .

After performing the process of step S1101, it progresses to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, a special effect mode process is executed. In this embodiment, a normal effect mode and a special effect mode are provided as effect modes in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. The special production mode is shifted when the number of games executed in the normal production mode reaches a preset number (specified number of times), and returns to the normal production mode when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is a configured production mode. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, in the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the time-saving production mode is set as the production mode, and in the special production mode, the production performed in the time-saving production mode is diverted. It is configured to be Here, the special effect mode processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Processing for special effect mode)
In the special effect mode processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, update processing of the number-of-games counter for the special effect mode provided in the number-of-games counter area 462 of the RAM 444 is performed. The number-of-games counter for the special effect mode is a counter for specifying the number of times the game is played in the normal effect mode.

After executing the update process in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, the value of the number-of-games counter for the special production mode is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal production mode has reached a preset number (prescribed number of times). If a negative determination is made in step S1203, the process for this special effect mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, processing for shifting to the special effect mode is performed. Specifically, a process of switching the light-emitting body mode of the lamp section 26 to one corresponding to the special effect mode is performed, and a process of switching the BGM output from the speaker section 29 to one corresponding to the special effect mode is performed. Then, a special effect mode start command is output to the display control device 410 to switch the display mode of the background and the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 to the mode corresponding to the special effect mode. After that, in step S1205, a special effect mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the process for this special effect mode ends. Since the special effect mode flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 thereafter.

Returning to the description of step S1201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, the pseudo-variation number counter provided in the RAM 444 is referred to, and the number of times the pseudo-variation (unit effect) described later is executed is the lower limit of the end reference number of times that can be set in the high-frequency support mode (this 10 times) is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the process for this special effect mode is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a continuation lottery process for the special effect mode is executed. That is, when the number of times of the unit performance executed in the special performance mode reaches the lower limit value, whether or not to continue the special performance mode is determined by lottery.

If the lottery process in step S1207 results in a continuation result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208, and the process for this special effect mode ends as it is. If the lottery process in step S1207 results in non-continuation, a negative determination is made in step S1208, and the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, a special effect mode end flag is set in various flag storage area 466 of RAM444. When this special performance mode end flag is set, a process of switching the performance mode from the special performance mode to the normal performance mode is performed at the end of the current game round.

After that, in step S1210, after executing the resetting process for the specified number of times, the process for this special effect mode ends. A plurality of candidates are provided for the specified number of times, and one of the candidates is selected by lottery in the resetting process. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the span from the end of the special effect mode to the transition to the next special effect mode.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing in FIG. 28 again, after executing the special effect mode processing in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not a special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM444. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. At step S1105, an effect determination process for the normal effect mode is executed based on the information grasped at step S1101.

Specifically, when the game result of the game round to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the big win result (that is, the probability variable big win result or the normal big win result), the performance setting process for the big win is executed. In the effect setting process for the big win, the final stop result of the symbol for the big win is determined (the final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, in the case of a probability variable jackpot result, a combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) or non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on one active line L1 to L5 The stop result in which the combination of the main symbols) is finally stopped and displayed is determined as the stop result of this game round. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is finally stopped and displayed on one activated line L1 to L5 is displayed in this game round. Determined as the final stop result.

The type of the main symbol to be finally stopped and the valid lines L1 to L5 to be displayed when a big win is achieved are randomly determined by a lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and address information. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following explanation, the stop result address information determined by various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 444 .

Also, in the effect setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big win is determined (performs the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process)). As already explained, when the jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through the ready-to-win display or the like. In the variable display mode determination processing for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the game at the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time is determined. A production pattern of normal ready-to-win display or super ready-to-win display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination processing described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM444.

If the game result is not a jackpot result and the game result is a game result in which a reach occurs, an effect setting process for the occurrence of a reach (loss reach) corresponding to the loss result is executed. In this effect setting process, the outline of the effect and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former is the same as the processing in the case of a jackpot result, so the description is used. Since this process corresponds to the loss reach, the final stop symbol is determined so as not to result in a symbol combination corresponding to the big win result. That is, the final stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of winning reach symbol combinations and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, in this determination, the same pattern combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same pattern of the medium pattern row Z2 as the pattern forming the reach line is placed on the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so as to make the final stop at a forward or backward stop position. After that, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If neither the result of big hit nor the result of failure corresponding to the ready-to-win display, ie, the result of complete failure, the outline of the effect for complete failure and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to a complete loss, the stop symbols are determined so as not to form a symbol combination corresponding to the result of a big win.

After executing the determination process of step S1105, the process advances to step S1108 to execute a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on these various commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 in order to execute the effects in the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1108, in the subsequent step S1109, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game cycle, the process for starting the variation is finished. Specifically, based on the effect pattern determined in step S1105, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to start the effect for the game round.

Here, based on FIG. 29, a supplementary description will be given of the variable display mode of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) in the normal effect mode. FIG. 30(a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 30(b) group is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. In addition, in FIG. 30(b), for convenience of explanation, a background image, pending information, and the like displayed on the display screen 253a are omitted.

(Variable display mode in normal production mode)
As shown in FIG. 30(a), there are 5 major variations in the pattern display mode executed on the display screen 253a: complete failure, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. separated. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and an outline of the variable display mode for each round of the game is grasped based on the information relating to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible.

Specifically, the variable display time for complete deviation is "1 sec to 17 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), the variable display time for normal reach A is "18 sec", and the variable display time for normal reach B "20 sec or 22 sec", which is longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A, "22 sec or 24 sec", which is the same as or longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach B, for the fluctuation display time of super reach A, fluctuation of super reach B The display time is "24 sec or 26 sec" which is the same as or longer than the variable display time of super reach A, and the variable display time of super reach C is "26 sec or 28 sec" which is longer than the variable display time of other super reach B. It has become. For example, when the information about the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "22 sec", the notification/production control device 140 grasps that normal reach B or super reach A should be executed. , which reach display is to be selected.

In addition, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easy to select in the order of Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. Outgoing > normal reach A > normal reach B > super reach A > super reach B > super reach C are likely to be selected in this order. In other words, the longer the variable display time is, the higher the expectation for winning the jackpot is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30(b1), the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B will be described. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is finished (stopped). display), and then finish the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 (stop display). While the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this way, the main symbols with the same number attached to any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13(a)) are stopped and displayed. to form a reach line. Then, under the condition that the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbol row Z2 in the middle stage is performed, so that the reach display (reach variable display) is performed. After the ready-to-win display is displayed, the variable display is terminated by stopping display of the symbol row Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the same pattern as the pattern forming the ready-to-win display stops on the reach line, the fact that the jackpot has been won is reported, and when other patterns stop on the same reach line, the big win is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined fixed display time (final stop time). That is, the current game round continues until the fixed display time elapses, and when the fixed display time elapses, the transition to the next game round is allowed.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is ensured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the medium symbol row Z2 after the ready-to-reach line is formed. , and how to set the difference between them is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display to the formation of the reach line, it is possible to secure the difference in the variable display time.

Next, based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B and C will be described. As shown in FIGS. 30(b2) to (b4), for super reach lines A, B, and C, the reach lines described above are formed through the same process as for normal reach lines A and B. FIG. After the ready-to-win line is formed, the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in conjunction with the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character resembling a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in super reach B, After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in super reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character modeled after a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(pseudo continuous fluctuation display)
In the normal effect mode in the present embodiment, in both the game times corresponding to the ready-to-win display and the game times not corresponding to the ready-to-win display, a suggestive effect to suggest to the player that there is a possibility of shifting to the ready-to-win display is provided. may be executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 31(a) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestive effect is not executed, and FIG. 31(b) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestive effect is executed. 31(a) and 31(b) also omit the illustration of the background image, hold information, etc. displayed on the display screen 253a, as in FIG. 30(b).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), at the start timing of the game round, the variable display of each symbol row that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a until then is started. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the variable display, the variable display speed of the symbols is reduced, and the symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol row→lower symbol row→middle symbol row. When the current game round does not correspond to the suggested effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is finally displayed on the activated line, and the game result is clearly indicated to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 31(a), since the game result is a result of complete loss, the symbol combination corresponding to complete loss is displayed on the active line in the final stop.

FIG. 31(b) exemplifies the game times corresponding to the suggestion effect and the ready-to-win display. At the start timing of the game round, the variable display of each symbol row that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a is started. After that, the symbol variation display speed is reduced, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol row→lower symbol row→middle symbol row. When the lower symbol row stops, the symbols of the upper symbol row and the reach line are not formed, that is, the symbols that can form the reach line together with the stopped upper symbol in the lower symbol row are shifted from the upper symbol. position. After that, when the middle symbol row is stopped and all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display, temporary stop display), the symbol combination corresponding to the above suggestion (re-fluctuation symbol combination, or , temporary stop symbol combination) are formed.

After that, all the temporarily stopped symbol rows resume variation with specific sound effects and effects such as flashes. In other words, the temporary stop→re-fluctuation is performed in a situation where it appears as if one game round has ended, but the game round is actually continued. In other words, before the final stop display, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-fluctuation is temporarily stopped and then changed again, which is the suggestive effect in the present embodiment. ” is also called.

The pseudo-continuous variation display may be continuously (repeatedly) executed a plurality of times during one game round. It should be noted that during the pseudo-continuous variation display, even when all the symbol rows are stopped, the symbol variation display continues for the display portions UD and LD for the activation port of the main display unit 87 that correspond to the current game round. be done.

After the restart of the variable display, the timing of the final stop display (final display) is reached, and the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is stopped and displayed (final stop display) on the active line, and the game result is displayed to the player. specified in In the example shown in FIG. 31(b), since the game result is the result of the big win, the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the big win is stopped (finally stopped) on the activated line.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous variation display in the present embodiment occurs not only in the game times corresponding to the ready-to-win display, but also in the game times corresponding to the complete loss result. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the jackpot does not stop, or the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the jackpot does not stop, by leaving room for the jackpot, the degree of attention to the stopped symbol combination stops in the lower symbol row and the middle symbol row. It is possible to make it difficult to cause inconvenience such as a sudden decrease when it is applied.

In addition, regarding the table that determines whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is possible, the pseudo continuous fluctuation display occurs in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result compared to the game round corresponding to the out of reach result and the game round corresponding to the complete out of reach result. In addition, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to the out of reach result than in the game times corresponding to the complete out of reach result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, a supplementary description will be given of the flow when the pseudo-continuous variation display is repeated during one game round. FIG. 32(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect and the expected degree of big win. In FIG. 32(a), in order to facilitate comparison, game times ta1 to ta2 are examples of game times not corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation display, and ta3 to ta9 are game times corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation display. exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), at the timing of ta1 when the game cycle not corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation display starts, the variation display of the pattern is started in the operation opening display section of the main display unit 87. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, the variable display of the symbols has started. At the timing of ta2 when a predetermined variable display time has passed after the start of the variable display of the patterns and patterns, the patterns that have been variably displayed on the display unit for the operating port are made to correspond to the game result of this time. , and the symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen 253a are stopped and displayed so as to form a symbol combination corresponding to the game result of this time. In other words, the start/end timing of the variation is synchronized (matched) between the operating port display section and the display screen 253a.

At the timing of ta3 when the game cycle corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation display starts, the variation display of the pattern is started in the display part for the operation port of the main display unit 87, and the pattern is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 accordingly. has started to change. After the variable display is started at the timing of ta3, the re-variation symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a at the timing of ta4 after a predetermined period has passed.

At timing ta5 when the temporary stop time has elapsed from timing ta4, the temporarily stopped variable display of each symbol row is resumed. At this time, a white effect is added along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a, suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to the ready-to-reach display. During this time, the variable display of the pattern is continued on the display portion for the operating port of the main display unit 87, and the variable display of the pattern on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the pattern on the display portion for the operating port are asynchronous.

At the timing ta6 when a predetermined period has passed since the restart of the variable display, the re-variable symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed again on the active line of the display screen 253a. At timing ta7 when the temporary stop time has elapsed from timing ta6, the temporarily stopped variable display of each symbol row is resumed. At this time, the color of the white effect being displayed on the display screen 253a is changed from white to blue. Although the details will be described later, the repetition of the pseudo-continuous-variation display (change (step-up) of the effect color) suggests that the possibility of shifting to the ready-to-win display has increased. During this period, the variable display of the pattern is continued in the display section for the operating port, and the variable display of the pattern on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the pattern in the display section for the operating port are asynchronous.

At the timing of ta8 after the timing of ta7 when the variable display of the symbols is resumed, that is, at the timing of transition to the ready-to-win display, the upper and lower symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and only the middle symbol row continues to be displayed in a variable manner. state. In the example shown in FIG. 32(a), the current game result corresponds to the result of losing. For this reason, after shifting to the ready-to-reach display, more specifically, at timing ta9 when the fluctuation display time has elapsed from timing ta3, the pattern corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the operating opening, and the deviation is displayed on the display screen 253a. The symbol combination corresponding to the result is finally displayed. After that, at the timing of ta10 after the fixed display time has passed, the next game cycle is started.

In the above example, the pseudo-continuous variation display is repeated twice during one game, but the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation display is repeated during one game is limited to a certain extent (in the present embodiment, 1 to 6 times) is set. Regarding the table that determines the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display, the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display that is set in comparison with the game times corresponding to the result of out of reach and the game times corresponding to the result of complete loss in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is likely to increase, and in the game times corresponding to the reach out result, the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display to be set tends to increase compared to the game times corresponding to the complete loss result. . As the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuation displays increases, the degree of expectation for a big win increases. Therefore, it is assumed that a player who expects a big win expects that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation displays will continue many times. In the present embodiment, the continuous number of pseudo-continuous-variation displays is shown with the variation display executed after the first temporary stop as the first time.

In the present embodiment, the color of the effect on the display screen 253a changes every time the pseudo-continuous-variation display continues, suggesting the degree of expectation for shifting to the ready-to-win display. Even if the player misses a part of the pseudo-continuous display, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of transition to the ready-to-win display from the color of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the effect displayed during the pseudo-continuous display changes in the order of white→blue→yellow→green→red→rainbow as the number of continuous pseudo-continuous change display increases. It is set so that the degree of expectation for shifting to the ready-to-win display, in other words, the degree of expectation for the result of a big win increases in the order of white<blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow. Of these colors, green to rainbow (4 to 6 consecutive times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display) confirms the transition to super reach, and especially big hits are confirmed for rainbow (6 consecutive times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display) do.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects the quasi-continuous display to occur during the game, and that the quasi-continuous variation display will continue if it occurs. By diversifying the effects other than the ready-to-win display in the game times executed in the normal effect mode, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing in FIG. 28, when a negative determination is made in step S1102 of the fluctuation start processing, that is, when the normal game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, effect determination processing for the high-frequency support mode is executed. After executing the effect determination process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108, the stop result command and the pattern command are set based on the determined contents, and after executing the game round effect start process in step S1109, this fluctuation End the start process.

In the effect determination process of step S1107, when the game result of the current game round is a big win result (that is, a probability variable big win result or a normal big win result), a big win effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process for the big win, the final stop result of the symbol for the big win is determined (the final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, if the result is a probability variable jackpot, the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) or the combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on the active line The stop result displayed as the final stop is determined as the stop result of this game cycle. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) is finally stopped and displayed on the activated line is determined as the stop result of this game round. .

Also, in the effect setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big win is determined (performs the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process)). As already explained, when the jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through the ready-to-win display or the like. In the variable display mode determination processing for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the game at the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time is determined. A performance pattern of ready-to-win display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

When the game result corresponds to the loss reach, an effect setting process for generating a reach corresponding to the loss result is executed. In this effect setting process, the outline of the effect and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former is the same as the processing in the case of a jackpot result, so the description is used. Since this processing corresponds to the loss reach, the stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit result. In other words, the stop result in which the combination of off-reach symbols on the effective line is established is determined as the current stop result. In this determination, the stop result on the effective line is determined so that the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2, which are the same as the symbols forming the reach line, are finally stopped at a stop position shifted forward or backward with respect to the reach line. After that, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If neither the result of big hit nor the result of failure corresponding to the ready-to-win display, ie, the result of complete failure, the outline of the effect for complete failure and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to a complete loss, the stop symbols are determined so as not to form a symbol combination corresponding to the result of a big win.

As already explained, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched to the right route are guided by the electric accessory 91 to the lower operation opening 83b. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the variation display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss result is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode (see FIGS. 24(b) and 24(c)). In this way, by changing the progress speed of the game, the sharpness of the game is strengthened.

During the above-described normal effect mode, substantially the entire display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is set as the symbol variable display area ME. On the other hand, during the production mode (time saving production mode) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. SE), the symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and the symbol is variably displayed/stopped in the upper right area. A girl character CP1 is displayed in an area (central portion of the display screen 253a) that has been vacated by displaying the symbols in reduced size, and this character CP1 performs a predetermined action (movement) according to the progress of the game. In this way, by significantly changing the display mode from the low-frequency support mode, the normal performance mode in the low-frequency support mode and the short-time performance mode in the high-frequency support mode are differentiated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33(b) and 34, the flow of effects in the high frequency support mode will be described. FIG. 33(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display effects. In addition, FIG. 33(b) illustrates a case where the game cycle corresponding to the losing result is started at timings tb1, tb3, tb5, and tb7.

In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), at the timing of tb1 during the high-frequency support mode, the variable display of the symbols stopped in the reduced display area SE of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) is started. there is The girl character CP1 displayed in the lower right portion (initial position) of the display screen 253a starts to move across the display screen 253a from the right to the left in accordance with the start of the variable display of the symbols ( See FIG. 34(a1)). In the present embodiment, after the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character CP2, it shifts to the ready-to-reach display. A moving image is displayed.

At the timing of tb2, the final stop display (confirmation display) of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the failure is displayed in the reduced display area SE. The character CP1 returns to the initial position (lower right portion of the display screen 253a) from timing tb2 to timing tb3 when the fixed display time has elapsed.

A series of actions of the character CP1 displayed between timings tb1 and tb2 are stored in the character ROM 476 of the display control device 410 as effect data. The timings of tb3 to tb4 and the timings of tb5 to tb6 are also game rounds corresponding to complete loss, and using the above-mentioned production data, the same production (search production) as the timing of tb1 to tb2 is repeated. It will happen.

At the timing of tb7 after the timing of tb6, the game round corresponding to the loss reach is started. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, the variable display of the symbol in the reduced display area SE and the moving image display of the character in the variable display area ME are started at the timing of tb6. At timing tb8 after a predetermined time (for example, the same time as the variable display time shown at timings tb1 to tb2) has passed from timing tb7, a branch effect (capture production) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen, and in the branch effect, a chasing game between the girl character CP1 and the fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen 253a. will be displayed. Whether or not the girl character CP1 is able to catch the fairy character CP2 through the chasing game is clearly indicated as to whether or not to shift to the ready-to-reach display. In the game times corresponding to the ready-to-win display, a display (success display) is made in which the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character CP2 in the branching effect, and in the game times not corresponding to the ready-to-win display, the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character in the branching effect. character CP2 is missed (failure display).

In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), the success display is made at the timing of tb9, and the ready-to-reach display is displayed. At timing tb9, a stage is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and a scoreboard is displayed above the stage. Then, the girl character CP1, which has been waiting (stopped) in the corner of the display screen 253a until then, moves toward the stage, and after reaching the stage, a singing performance of singing a song is executed (for example, FIG. 34(b)). )reference).

When the singing performance ends, the numbers that have been variably displayed on the scoreboard are stopped and displayed, and the winning/failing result of this game round is notified by the stopped-displayed numbers (scores). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(b), when the current game round corresponds to the result of a big win, "100 points" is displayed on the scoreboard and the variation display of the middle symbol row is displayed. It stops, and the symbol combination corresponding to the big win is finally stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the current game round corresponds to the result of losing, "0 point" is displayed on the scoreboard, and along with this, the middle pattern row that has been continuously displayed in fluctuation stops, and the result of losing The symbol combination corresponding to is finally stopped and displayed. The timing at which the pattern is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win effect is synchronized with the timing at which the variable display of the pattern in the operating opening display section of the main display unit 87 ends.

In addition, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, 5 seconds may be set as the variable display time in some of the game rounds corresponding to complete failure (see FIG. 24). The sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (1 sec) matches the execution time (6 sec) of the branch effect in the game round corresponding to the ready-to-win display. In the game round corresponding to the complete loss, the game round ends without transitioning to the ready-to-win display after the failure display is executed in the branch effect.

As already explained, the high-frequency support mode is roughly divided into those that shift after the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result and those that shift after the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Regarding the latter, particularly, when the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches a preset end reference number of times, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. The time-saving production mode described above also ends with the transition to the low-frequency support mode. At the time of this transition, an effect (end suggesting effect) corresponding to the end of the time saving effect mode is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(a2), the display screen 253a darkens during the variable display to the fixed display in the game cycle associated with the end of the time saving performance mode. Then, when the fixed display is finished, the darkening is canceled and the reduced display of the pattern is canceled, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal effect mode. The end suggestion effect is configured to occur even in game times other than the game times related to the end of the time saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a darkens during the variable display to the final display, after the darkening is canceled with the end of the final display, the display in the time-saving effect mode is continued (Fig. 34 (a2) → see (a1)).

During the time-saving performance mode, a performance (announcement performance) suggesting the contents of the reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 is performed with a predetermined probability before the game cycle related to the reserved information is started. It is configured to run with By executing the performance corresponding to the reservation information not yet targeted for the lottery at the timing before the game round related to the reservation information is executed, the player can experience the reservation corresponding to the game round currently in progress. In addition to the game of confirming the lottery result of the information, the game of confirming or predicting the result when the pending information to be the lottery target later becomes the lottery object according to the contents of the above-mentioned performance is added, and the game is diversified. is planned. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, in order to enable such an advance notice performance, information such as whether or not the result of the big win is supported before the start of the game round related to the stored reservation information. It is configured to be specified in advance. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 and 36, various processing for the advance notice effect executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, specifically the holding executed as part of the information acquisition processing (see FIG. 19). A supplementary description will be given of the confirmation process for advance notice and the pending command setting process.

(Confirmation processing for pending notice)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the suspension notice confirmation process, in step S1301, the operation suspension storage number N and the common suspension number CRN stored in the suspension number storage area of the suspension ball storage area 432 are read, and the suspension Information on the number is stored in a register of MPU 402 . After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the reservation information acquired by the winning of this time includes the information of winning the jackpot. Specifically, first, in step S1302, information for judging a big hit among the holding information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired random number counter C1 Grasp.

In subsequent step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 . If the mode is the low probability mode, proceed to step S1304, and refer to the success/failure table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) and the information for judging the big win (the value of the winning random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302. Then, it specifies whether the information is included in the information group corresponding to the winning of the jackpot. If the mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and the success/failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) and the information for judging the jackpot (the value of the winning random number counter C1) obtained in step S1302. to identify whether the information is included in the information set as the jackpot winning.

After executing each process of step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. If the information for judging the big win (the value of the winning random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to winning the big win, an affirmative decision is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1307. After the big win information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1307, the confirming process for this holding notice is terminated.

In addition, in the process of step S1307, the information for judging the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the winning of this time, that is, the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is referenced. Then, the type of jackpot is determined. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 at step S1407 includes information relating to the type of the jackpot.

If the information for judging the big win (the value of the winning random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 does not correspond to winning the big win, a negative decision is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winnings to the operation ports 83a, 83b, information for out-reach determination, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the subsequent step S1309, by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 403, the reach grasped in step S1308 It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as reach winning.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process advances to step S1310 to determine whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1311, and then this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Setting process of pending command)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the hold command setting process, first, in step S1401, by determining whether or not the big hit information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, the check process for the previous hold notice (Fig. 35) It is determined whether or not the information is identified as corresponding to winning a jackpot. When the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S1402 to set a jackpot corresponding hold command. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404 . It should be noted that the jackpot corresponding hold command includes information on the jackpot type.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that the big hit information is not stored in the register of the MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 By determining , it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination corresponds to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 35). If the reach occurrence information is stored, the off-reach corresponding pending command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete missing corresponding pending command is set in step S1405.

When the pending command is set in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and the information on the variable display time is stored in the pending command. . When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as the variable display time setting process shown in step S708. The suspension command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/production control device 140, and the notification/production control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern based on the suspension command. In addition, as already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored when starting the game cycle related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the complete-disconnect-response hold command, the variable display time is provisionally set.

The notification/effect control device 140 determines whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the hold command received from the main control device 162 and the lottery table for the notice effect. The lottery table for the advance notice effect is set to be higher in the order of pending command corresponding to the result of complete loss<holding command corresponding to the result of out of reach<holding command corresponding to the big win result. As for the types of effects in the notice production, there are six patterns of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the above-described pseudo-continuous change display, and the degree of expectation for a big hit result is white < blue. <Yellow<Green<Red<Rainbow> is set to increase in order. In addition, green to rainbow among the effect colors in the notice production correspond to the reach display, and the point that the rainbow corresponds to the jackpot is also the same as the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and it is confirmed that the reach display will occur. The effect won't be green or better if you don't, or the effect will be rainbow if you're not guaranteed to win the jackpot.

When the hold command is received in a situation where the effect is not generated, it is determined whether the effect is to be generated in the game round before the game round related to the hold command, and the effect is generated. When a hold command is received under a situation where the player is in a state where the player is on, it is determined whether or not the color of the effect is to be ranked up in the game round prior to the game round related to the hold command. The effect that has occurred once is erased by either the mode transition effect or the ready-to-win effect described above.

In addition, in the pseudo continuous variation display, the effect display is completed during one game round, whereas in the advance notice effect, the effect display is continued over a plurality of game rounds. They are different in that respect. In the pseudo-continuous variation display, the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation and the color of the effect match. . That is, in the advance notice effect, the color of the effect may not change (step up) even if the game progresses.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In FIG. 37(a), there are two pieces of hold information waiting after the game round being executed, and the notice effect is started with the second hold information (hold information corresponding to the big hit result) as a trigger. This is an example of a case where

When the final stop display (confirmed display) of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is performed, the advance notice effect is started with the hold information (hit result) after two symbols as a trigger. In this advance notice effect, a white effect along the periphery of the display screen 253a is added to the display screen 253a. This effect will be carried over to the next game round.

When the pattern combination corresponding to the result of losing is displayed in the final stop display (confirmed display) after shifting to the next game round, the color of the effect is changed from white to blue. This suggests that the possibility of occurrence of reach display (jackpot) has increased. This effect is carried over to the next game round (that is, the relevant game round that triggered the suspension notice). The corresponding game round corresponds to the reach display, and the effect being displayed is deleted when the main game round (reach display) ends.

In the present embodiment, the variable display time corresponding to the ready-to-win display in the high frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the ready-to-win display in the low-frequency support mode, thereby speeding up the progress of the game. is planned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), in the low frequency support mode, 18 sec to 28 sec is set as the variable display time corresponding to the reach display, whereas in the high frequency support mode , the variable display time corresponding to the reach display is unified to 17 seconds. The reach display executed in the high-frequency support mode is all configured to be super reach D as described above.

Here, in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the production mode becomes the special production mode, so that the main production including the reach display is the same as the time saving production mode. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time-saving production mode is occurring during the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode It suppresses the monotony of the game.

However, since the special production mode is a production mode that is executed during the low-frequency support mode, even if the same production (super reach D) as the special production mode is executed, the variable display time will be adjusted accordingly. is not shortened. That is, even if the variable display time corresponding to any of normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C is set in the main control device 162, the notification / production control device 140 is configured to execute super reach D instead of these various reach based on the fact that the effect mode is a special effect mode. In this case, a difference occurs in the variable display time between the super reach D executed in the high frequency support mode and the super reach D executed in the special effect mode. One of the characteristics is that the flow of production in the special production mode is brought closer to the flow of production in the time-saving production mode by making good use of the part where the difference occurs. The configuration relating to the special effect mode will be described below.

First, returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing in FIG. Proceed to S1106. At step S1106, an effect determination process for the special effect mode is executed. After executing the effect determination process in step S1106, the stop result command and the pattern command are set based on the determined contents in step S1108, and after executing the game round effect start process in step S1109, this fluctuation start End the process. Here, the effect determination processing for the special effect mode will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

(Production determination processing for special production mode)
As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the effect determination process for the special effect mode, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result (that is, the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result). judge. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current game cycle corresponds to the loss reach. If an affirmative determination is made in either step S1501 or step S1502, a special effect setting process for reach is executed in step S1503. On the other hand, when negative determinations are made in both steps S1501 and S1502, that is, when the current game cycle corresponds to complete loss, a special effect setting process for complete loss is executed in step S1504.

(Special effect setting processing for reach)
As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the special effect setting process for ready-to-win, first, in step S1511, the time from the start of fluctuation to transition to ready-to-win display is specified. As already explained, the reach display is unified to super reach D in the special effect mode. That is, even when any of 18 sec to 28 sec is designated as the variable display time from the main controller 162, super reach D is executed (see FIG. 37(b)). In this embodiment, the execution time of the reach display in super reach D is defined to be 10 seconds, and by subtracting the execution time of super reach D from the variable display time in this game round, the transition to the reach display is made. The time required to complete the process is specified.

In the following step S1512, the value obtained by dividing the time required to shift to the ready-to-win display by the reference time, that is, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the interval before the reach-to-win display in the game round by the reference time (in the following description, each divided interval is also called "part"). Here, a supplementary description of the reference time will be given with reference to FIG. 24(c). As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched in the right route are supported by the electric accessory 91 and enter the lower operation opening 83b. Therefore, in the situation where the game ball is continuously shot to the right route during the high frequency support mode, the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 83b changes from "2" to "4", and most games Each time, the variable display time is 1 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec. In other words, the required time required for one game round is 2 seconds in many cases.

The character ROM 476 of the notification/effect control device 140 stores an effect (a moving image in which the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a) with a playback time of 2 seconds. The production is configured to be played back repeatedly. This time is the reference time. In the following description, the moving image described above and the symbol fluctuation display to stop display (including both the temporary stop display and the fixed display) performed in parallel with the moving image are referred to as a "first special effect". In addition, at the time of the temporary stop display in the special effect mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete loss is displayed so as to resemble the time saving effect mode. By the way, in the special effect mode, a configuration is realized in which the first special effect etc. is used to make it appear as if the game rounds are progressing one after another. Also called "display".

For example, when the variable display time is 18 sec, the time required to reach the reach display is 8 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "4". When the variable display time is 20 sec, the required time until reach display is 10 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "5". When the variable display time is 22 sec, the time required to reach the reach display is 12 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "6". When the variable display time is 24 sec, the required time until reach display is 14 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "7". When the variable display time is 26 sec, the time until reach display is 16 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "8". When the variable display time is 28 sec, the required time until reach display is 18 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "9".

In the following step S1513, the upper limit (continuous number of times) in which the first special effect can be continuously executed in the section before shifting to the ready-to-win display is determined by referring to the continuous number setting table stored in the ROM 443 and random numbers for lottery. to set. Specifically, a first consecutive number of times and a second consecutive number of times that the first special effect can be continuously executed are set.

It should be noted that both the first consecutive number of times and the second consecutive number of times in the present embodiment indicate the number of times the first special effect is continuously executed without intervening the second special effect or the third special effect, which will be described later. For example, when the first special effect is executed once, the first consecutive number = "1", and when the first special effect is executed twice in succession, the second consecutive number = "2". . On the other hand, the number of consecutive fluctuation displays until the first special production is "0" and the second special production or the third special production is completed is called "continuous fluctuation number" and is distinguished from the number of consecutive fluctuations. For example, when the first special effect is executed once, the number of continuous changes = "0", when the first special effect is executed twice in succession, the number of continuous changes = "1", the first special effect is executed twice in succession, and then the second special effect is executed, the number of continuous fluctuations=“2”. 40, 41, etc., which will be referred to in the following description, the number of continuous fluctuations in each part is represented by numbers.

When this game round corresponds to the loss reach, the continuous count setting table for the loss reach stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. The setting table for the number of consecutive times for losing reach is provided with "1" to "5" as the first consecutive number, and one of these five candidates is set as the first consecutive number in this game round.

When this game round corresponds to winning reach, the consecutive times setting table for winning reach stored in ROM 443 is referred to. The winning reach consecutive number setting table is provided with "1" to "6" as the first consecutive number, and one of these six candidates is set as the first consecutive number in this game round.

In the consecutive number setting table for out reach, the selection rate increases in the order of "5" < "4" < "3", "2", "1", and in the consecutive number setting table for hit reach, "1" < " 2”<“3”<“6”<“5”<“4” in order of higher selection probability. Therefore, the greater the number of consecutive wins, the higher the expectation of a big win. In addition, the number of consecutive times "6" corresponds to a big hit, and when the number of consecutive times becomes "6", that is, when the number of consecutive fluctuations including the second special effect becomes "6", at that point It will be in a state where it is clarified that the jackpot is confirmed. By the way, in the present embodiment, when the number of continuous fluctuations is "6", the effect, which will be described later, becomes rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first special effect group may be divided back and forth by interposing the second special effect in the interval before the ready-to-win display. The second consecutive number of times defines, for example, the upper limit of the number of consecutive first special effects in the divided first half. For the second consecutive number, "3" is set except for the following exceptions.

As a condition for setting a value other than "3" as the second consecutive number, there is a case where the first consecutive number is "5" or more in response to a big win. In such a case, the second consecutive number of times may be increased to the same number as the first consecutive number of times. If the second consecutive number is raised from "3" to "4" to "6", an event may occur where the consecutive number reaches, for example, "4" but does not develop into Super Reach. functions as a definite effect in which it is determined that the jackpot will be hit immediately after that.

In the RAM 444 of the notification/effect control device 140, the number of times (continuous result) of the first special effect executed before the start of the game time (for example, in the game time immediately before), more specifically, another effect is sandwiched between A continuation counter is provided for storing the number of times the first special effect is repeated (continuous result). The continuous counter is incremented by "1" each time the first special effect is executed, and is "0" by executing effects other than the first special effect (for example, a second special effect and a third special effect, which will be described later). It is configured to be cleared. For example, when the first special effect is continuous over a plurality of game times executed before the game time, that is, when the first special effect is repeated without intervening other special effects Even so, the continuous result counter is incremented each time the first special effect is performed. In the subsequent step S1514, the continuation result is identified by referring to this continuation counter.

After that, in step S1515, pattern setting processing for ready-to-win effects (pattern setting processing for ready-to-win effects) is executed, and then this setting processing for special effects ends. Here, the ready-to-win effect pattern setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Reach effect pattern setting process)
In the ready-to-win effect pattern setting process, first, in step S1601, the section (divided part) before the ready-to-win display in the game round is divided into two sections. Specifically, when executing the super reach D in the special effect mode, the branch effect (hereinafter also referred to as the second special effect) is passed through in the same manner as in the time saving effect mode. The execution time of the second special effect (6 sec in this embodiment) is an integral multiple of the part (reference time). Therefore, a plurality of parts before the super reach D are for the second special effect, and the section before the reach display is the first half section (first section) for the first special effect and the second half section (second section) for the branch effect section). Incidentally, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the second special effect from the interval before the ready-to-win display is the time during which the first special effect can be executed in the first half section.

After dividing into the first half section/second half section in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the number of parts constituting the first half section is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times (first number of consecutive times) set in step S1513. Although the details will be described later, if the first special effect is applied to all the parts that make up the first half section, if the number of consecutive times exceeds the first number of times, the flow of the effect tends to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when there is a possibility of exceeding at least the first consecutive number of times, the second special effect is arranged in any of the above parts in order to prevent the first special effect from continuing so as to exceed the first consecutive number of times. A performance pattern is determined by doing so. For example, the first special effect group is divided back and forth so that the second special effect is interposed between a plurality of consecutive first special effects.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the value of the continuation counter is referenced to determine whether or not the continuation result from the previous game round is "0", that is, whether or not the previous game round ended other than the first special effect. judge.

If the value of the continuation counter is "0", the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in this game round is changed in step S1604 without considering the flow from the previous game round. decide. Specifically, in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140, the first special pattern table is stored according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, etc., and step S1604. In the processing, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among those first special pattern tables, and the selected first special pattern table is referenced to determine the performance pattern. The first special pattern table is broadly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the losing result.

In the table group corresponding to the big hit result, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the production pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the production pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a configuration that tends to increase the number of consecutive special effects.

For example, if the number of game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the first consecutive number is "6", the second consecutive number is "2", and the number of parts in the first half section is "6", select the one that meets those conditions. Effect patterns A1, B1, C1, and D1 are provided in the first special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions (see FIG. 40(a)).

The effect pattern A1 is configured to apply the first special effect to all parts of the first part to the sixth part, avoiding the intervention of the second special effect between the consecutive first special effects. be. When the game round is executed in this production pattern A1, the first special production is repeated six times before the transition to the second section, as shown in example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the pattern rows are changed in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)). The flow of temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the missing result is executed six times, and the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect executed in the second section is six times. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The production pattern B1 is configured to apply the first special production to the first part, the second special production to the second to fourth parts, and the first special production to the fifth to sixth parts. The special performance group is divided into the front and rear by the second special performance. In this production pattern B1, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, after the first special production is executed at the beginning of the game cycle, the second special production is executed, and the second special production is executed until the transition to the second section. , the first special effect is repeated twice. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the pattern rows are changed in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)). The flow of temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the missing result is executed twice immediately before the second section, and the number of continuous fluctuations when including the second special effect executed in the second section after that is 2. times. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern C1 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part to the second part, the second special effect to the third part to the fifth part, and the first special effect to the sixth part. The performance group is divided into front and rear by the second special performance. The effect pattern D1 is configured so that the second special effect is applied to the first to third parts, and the first special effect is applied to the fourth to sixth parts. The first special effect continues.

In the first special pattern table corresponding to the hit result described above, the number of times the first special effect continues before the ready-to-win display increases in the order of effect pattern C1 < effect pattern B1 < effect pattern D1 < effect pattern A1. The selection rate of each effect pattern also increases in the order of effect pattern C1<effect pattern B1<effect pattern D1<effect pattern A1.

In the table group corresponding to the outlier result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a structure that tends to reduce the number of consecutive special effects.

In this way, one game round is pseudo-divided into a plurality of game rounds so that the game rounds are shown to progress at short pitches, thereby giving the player the impression of a time-saving performance mode. can give.

Returning to the description of step S1603 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1603, if the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (if the value of the continuous counter is not 0), In step S1605, the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the present game round is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140, there is a second special pattern table according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the continuous result from the previous game round. are stored, and in the process of step S1604, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from those second special pattern tables, and the selected second special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

The second special effect pattern table, like the first special effect pattern table, is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the big win result and a table group corresponding to the losing result. For any of the table groups, the intervention point of the second special effect is defined so that the number of consecutive games does not exceed the upper limit (first number of consecutive games) in consideration of the previous game rounds.

In the table group corresponding to the big hit result, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the production pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the production pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a configuration that tends to increase the number of consecutive special effects.

For example, the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the first consecutive number is "6", the second consecutive number is "6", the number of parts in the first half section is "6", and the consecutive number from the previous game round is "1". , the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is referred to (see FIG. 40(b)). Effect patterns A2, B2, and C2 are provided in the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions.

The effect pattern A2 has a configuration in which the second special effect is applied to the first part to the third part, and the first special effect is applied to the fourth part to the sixth part, and the second special effect is executed at the beginning. After that, the first special effect continues. When the game round is executed in this production pattern A2, as shown in example 1 of the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, by executing the second special production at the beginning of the first section, The continuation from is interrupted before reaching the above upper limit. In the first section, the first special performance is repeated three times while the second special performance ends and the second section is shifted to. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the pattern rows are changed in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)). The flow of temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the missing result is executed three times, and the number of consecutive times is three when the second special effect executed in the second section is included. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern B2 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, and the first special effect to the fifth to sixth parts. The special performance group is divided into the front and rear by the second special performance. When the effect pattern B2 is executed as the effect pattern, the second special effect is executed after the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the first section, as shown in example 2 of the schematic diagram of FIG. executed. Due to this second special effect, the continuation from the previous game round is interrupted before reaching the upper limit. In the first section, the first special effect is repeated twice while the second special effect ends and the second section is shifted to. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the pattern rows are changed in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)). The flow of temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the missing result is executed twice, and the number of consecutive times is two when the second special effect executed in the second section is included. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern C2 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part to the second part, the second special effect to the third part to the fifth part, and the first special effect to the sixth part. The performance group is divided into front and rear by the second special performance. At the beginning of the first section, the first special effect is executed twice, and then the second special effect is executed. Therefore, the number of consecutive games from the previous game round is 4 in the second special effect. Originally, four times in a row corresponds to the development to super reach D, but in the performance pattern C2, the first special performance is executed again after the second special performance, and the development to super reach D does not occur. This effect pattern C2 is one of the contradictory effects described above.

In the second special pattern table corresponding to the hit results detailed above, the number of times the first special effect continues before the ready-to-win display increases in the order of effect pattern B1 < effect pattern A1, and the selection rate of each effect pattern. are also higher in the order of effect pattern B1 < effect pattern A1. On the other hand, in the second special pattern table for losing results, the number of consecutive first special effects before the ready-to-win display is configured to be smaller than in the second special pattern table for winning results. It should be noted that the selection rate of selecting the effect pattern C2 is configured to be lower than the selection rates of the effect pattern A2 and the effect pattern B2.

In the table group corresponding to the outlier result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a structure that tends to reduce the number of consecutive special effects.

In this way, one game round is pseudo-divided into a plurality of game rounds so that the game rounds are shown to progress at short pitches, thereby giving the player the impression of a time-saving performance mode. can give.

Returning to the description of step S1602 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, that is, if the number of parts in the first half section is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, by referring to the value of the continuation counter, it is determined whether or not the continuation result from the previous game round is 0, that is, whether or not the previous game round ended other than the first special effect. do.

When the value of the continuation counter is 0, in step S1607, the production pattern (distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) in this game round is determined without considering the flow from the previous game round. . Specifically, in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140, the third special pattern table is stored according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, etc., and step S1607. In the process, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from those third special pattern tables, and the selected third special pattern table is referenced to determine the performance pattern. The third special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the losing result.

In the table group corresponding to the big hit result, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the production pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the production pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a configuration that tends to increase the number of consecutive special effects.

In the table group corresponding to the outlier result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with fewer consecutive first special effects before transition to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive times. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a structure that tends to reduce the number of consecutive special effects.

The basic configuration of the third special pattern table is the same as that of the first special pattern table, but the first special effect executed before transitioning to the ready-to-win display is performed a smaller number of times in succession than the effect pattern with a large number of effects. bias in the selectivity of The number of parts in the first half section tends to be smaller in the game rounds in which the third special pattern table is referenced than in the game rounds in which the first special pattern table is referenced. By increasing the bias of the selection rate as described above, even if the number of parts in the first half section is small, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive times and the number of consecutive fluctuations before the ready-to-win display.

Returning to the description of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the above-mentioned continuous counter is not 0), step S1608 In consideration of the flow from the previous game round, the production pattern (distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) in the main game round is determined. Specifically, in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140, the fourth special pattern table is stored according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, etc., and step S1607. In the process, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among those fourth special pattern tables, and the selected fourth special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern. The fourth special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the losing result.

In the table group corresponding to the big hit result, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the production pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the production pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a configuration that tends to increase the number of consecutive special effects.

In the table group corresponding to the outlier result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before shifting to the ready-to-win display is more likely to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times. , When intervening the second special effect to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first special effect group (part) divided into the front and back by the second special effect After the second special effect It has a structure that tends to reduce the number of consecutive special effects.

The basic structure of the fourth special pattern table is the same as that of the second special pattern table, but the first special effect executed before transitioning to the ready-to-win display is performed a small number of times in succession, while the effect pattern has a large number of consecutive effects. bias in the selectivity of The number of parts in the first half section tends to be smaller in the game rounds in which the fourth special pattern table is referenced than in the game rounds in which the second special pattern table is referenced. By increasing the bias of the selection rate as described above, even if the number of parts in the first half section is small, the number of consecutive times before the ready-to-win display can be earned.

As described in detail above, one game round is pseudo-divided into a plurality of game rounds so that the game rounds are shown to progress at short pitches, so that the player feels as if the time-saving production mode has been entered. can give a good impression.

After executing the processing of steps S1604 to S1608, the process advances to step S1609 to execute effect setting processing. In the special effect mode in the present embodiment, the effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a under the condition that the first special effect is repeated. Sometimes. For this effect, there are a total of 6 colors, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the effect displayed during the pseudo-continuous change display in the normal production mode, and white < blue < yellow < green < It is set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of red < rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1609, the final effect color and its step-up pattern are determined based on the game result of this time and the production pattern determined in steps S1604 to S1608. In the case of a jackpot result, the final effect tends to be selected in the order of white<blue<yellow<rainbow<green<red. The effect set in step S1609 is canceled when the ready-to-win display ends in this game cycle.

By the way, the effect displayed during the special effect mode may also be displayed in the game round corresponding to the result of complete failure. For the effect that started to be displayed in the game round corresponding to the result of complete deviation, basically the second special effect, the third special effect, or the end of the reach display will be canceled, and the first special effect will be displayed. It is configured so that it will not be canceled under repeated circumstances. For this reason, the effect display may be continued across game rounds. In consideration of such circumstances, in the special effect mode, the number of consecutive first special effects and the number of step-ups of the effect do not necessarily match, and the number of step-ups is increased by keeping the color of the effect unchanged. may be less.

In the out-of-reach result, red<green<yellow<blue<white are more likely to be selected in this order, and rainbow is out of the selection candidates. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the case of a completely missing result, the final effect tends to be selected in the order of yellow<blue<white, and green, red, and rainbow are not selected candidates. In the normal production mode, rainbow colors correspond to big hits, and green, red, and rainbow colors correspond to super reach. By removing some colors from the selection candidates according to the game result, the effect display in the normal effect mode and the effect display in the special effect mode are associated with each other.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process for the special effect mode shown in FIG. The process advances to step S1504. After executing the special effect setting process for complete failure in step S1504, the effect determination process for this special effect mode is ended. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the special effect setting process for complete failure will be described.

(Special effect setting processing for complete failure)
In the special effect setting process for complete failure, first, in step S1701, the number of divisions (the number of parts) is calculated by dividing the variable display time of the game round by the reference time (2 sec), which is the execution time of the first special effect. . If a remainder is generated by division, it is rounded up to be the number of divisions. This is a device for using a part of the fixed display time (2 sec) after the variable display time as the execution time of the first special effect or the like. In view of such circumstances, it can be said that the calculation in step S1701 divides the entire interval, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (2 sec), by the reference time. In this case, the remainder is discarded.

For example, if the variable display time is 17 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 8, which is rounded up to "9". That is, when the variable display time is 17 seconds, the number of parts is "9". When the variable display time is 15 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 7, which is rounded up to "8". That is, when the variable display time is 15 sec, the number of parts is "8". If the variable display time is 3 sec, the division number obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 1, and is rounded up to "2". That is, when the variable display time is 3 sec, the number of parts is "2". When the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 0, and is rounded up to "1". That is, when the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of parts is "1".

In the following step S1702, the continuous number of times (upper limit) that can be executed continuously the first special effect in this game round is determined by referring to the continuous number setting table for complete failure and the random number for the lottery stored in the ROM 443. set.

The continuous count setting table for complete failure is provided with "1" to "3" as the continuous count, and one of these three candidates is set as the upper limit in this game cycle. The continuous count setting table for complete failure is configured such that the selection probability increases in the order of "1"<"2"<"3". Even if the upper limit is set to be large due to the balance with the variable display time and the influence of the consecutive results in the previous game rounds, the actual number of consecutive times will be smaller than that. Therefore, in the game round corresponding to the complete loss, the selection probability is stipulated so that the upper limit tends to increase, thereby suppressing the frequent occurrence of intervention such as the second special effect. .

In the subsequent step S1703, referring to the continuous counter provided in the RAM 444 of the notification/production control device 140, the number of times of the first special production executed before the start of the game round (for example, in the game round just before). (Continuous result), more specifically, the number of times the first special effect is repeated without intervening another effect (continuous result) is specified.

After executing the process of step S1703, it progresses to step S1704 and it is determined whether this game round is the last game round in special production mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special effect mode end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444 . The special effect mode end flag is a flag stored in step S1209 of the special effect mode processing (see FIG. 29).

If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process advances to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether subsequent hold information is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the above effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1704 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1707. finish. That is, when it is not the final game round of the continuous effect mode, and if there is subsequent suspension information, or if there is no subsequent suspension information but no effect has occurred, the first setting process is executed. It will be done. Here, the first setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 44 .

(First setting process)
In the first setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the total number of parts is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of consecutive times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is 0, that is, whether or not consideration should be given to the flow of the previous game round.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the value of the continuation counter is "0", that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the fifth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The fifth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1803, the fifth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the selected fifth special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

For example, when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "3" and the total number of parts is "9", the fifth special pattern table corresponding to those conditions is selected from among the respective fifth special pattern tables. Effect patterns A5, B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5 are provided in the fifth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions (see FIG. 45(a)).

The production pattern A5 applies the first special production to the first to third parts, the second special production to the fourth to sixth parts, and the first special production to the seventh to ninth parts. , and the first special effect group is divided back and forth by the second special effect. In this production pattern A5, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. The first special effect is repeated three times again until the game round ends. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the pattern rows are changed in the reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined variable display time (1 sec). As the game progresses, the flow of temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is executed three times with the second special effect intervening. That is, the intervening second special effect makes the number of continuous variations in the first half including the second special effect "3", and the number of continuous variations in the second half becomes "2". The game cycle ends with the continuous variation number being "2".

The effect pattern B5 includes the first special effect for the first part to the second part, the second special effect for the third part to the fifth part, the first special effect for the sixth part, and the second special effect for the seventh part to the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this performance pattern B5, the second special performance is executed after the first special performance is executed twice at the beginning of the game cycle, and the second special performance is executed again after one first special performance. be.

The effect pattern C5 includes the first special effect in the first part, the second special effect in the second to fourth parts, the first special effect in the fifth to sixth parts, and the second special effect in the seventh to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this performance pattern C5, the second special performance is executed after the first special performance is executed once at the beginning of the game cycle, and the second special performance is executed again after two first special performances. be.

The effect pattern D5 includes a first special effect for the first part, a second special effect for the second to fourth parts, a first special effect for the fifth part, a second special effect for the sixth to eighth parts, and a second special effect for the second to fourth parts. It has a configuration in which the first special effect is applied to each of the nine parts. In this production pattern D5, the first special production and the second special production are alternately executed.

The effect pattern E5 is configured so that the second special effect is applied to the first to third parts, the first special effect is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the second special effect is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. ing. In this performance pattern E5, after the second special performance is executed at the beginning of the game cycle, the first special performance is executed three times, and then the second special performance is executed again.

The effect pattern F5 includes the second special effect for the first part to the third part, the first special effect for the fourth part to the fifth part, the second special effect for the sixth part to the eighth part, and the first special effect for the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this production pattern F5, the first special production is executed twice after the second special production is executed at the beginning of the game round, and then the first special production is executed once again through the second special production. be.

The effect pattern G5 includes the second special effect in the first to third parts, the first special effect in the fourth part, the second special effect in the fifth to seventh parts, and the first special effect in the eighth to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In the performance pattern G5, the first special performance is executed once after the second special performance is executed at the beginning of the game round, and then the second special performance is performed and then the first special performance is executed again twice. be.

In this way, by combining the first special performance and the second special performance to show one game round divided into a plurality of pseudo game rounds, the player has an impression as if the time reduction mode has been entered. can give

In the fifth special pattern table detailed above, the number of executions of the second special effect (occupancy rate of the part) in the effect pattern A5 is smaller than in the effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5 and G5. , and the selection rate of each effect pattern is also set so that effect pattern B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, G5 < effect pattern A5. This prevents the appearance frequency of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the fifth special pattern table, the game round ends with either the first special effect or the second special effect. is "3" at maximum, and the number of consecutive fluctuations is "2" at maximum when the game cycle ends with the first special effect. The reason for providing the effect pattern in which the game round ends in the first special effect is to secure an opportunity to take over the continuous variation number in the next game round, assuming that the next game round is coming up. is. However, in such a configuration, it may be necessary to secure the time to end the continuous variation in the next game cycle. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, in addition to the second special effect, a third special effect that takes a shorter time than the second special effect is provided as a special effect that triggers the end of the continuous variation. there is For this third special effect, the required time is set so that the third special effect can be executed even if the variable display time of the next game cycle is the shortest (for example, 1 sec). As a result, even if the continuous variation is taken over to the next game round, the chance of ending the continuous variation in the next game round is ensured.

Returning to the description of FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (when the continuous result is not "0"), proceed to step S1804. move on. In step S1804, the sixth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The sixth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the total number of parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1804, the sixth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected sixth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the total number of parts is "9", and the continuous result from the previous game round is "1", select the sixth special pattern table corresponding to those conditions. select. Effect patterns A6, B6, C6, D6, and E6 are provided in the sixth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions (see FIG. 45(b)).

Production pattern A6 includes the first special production in the first part, the second special production in the second to fourth parts, the first special production in the fifth to sixth parts, and the second special production in the seventh to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this production pattern A6, as shown in example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the second special production is executed after the first special production is executed once at the beginning of the game round, and the second special production is completed. After that, the second special effect is executed again after two first special effects. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and all the pattern rows are changed in the reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined variable display time (1 sec). With the lapse of time, the flow of temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is executed a total of three times counting from the previous game, and is executed again twice with the second special performance intervening. In the first half of this game round, the number of consecutive fluctuations inherited from the previous game round is suppressed to "3". Then, in the second half of the main game round, the game round ends with the second special effect, and the continuous variation number is also suppressed to "2".

The production pattern B6 includes the first special production for the first part, the second special production for the second to fourth parts, the first special production for the fifth part, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the second special production for the second to fourth parts. The first special effect is applied to each of the 9 parts, and the first special effect group is divided back and forth by the second special effect. In this production pattern B6, the first special production and the second special production are alternately executed.

The effect pattern C6 is configured so that the second special effect is applied to the first to third parts, the first special effect is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the second special effect is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. ing.

The production pattern D6 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the first special production for the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect.

The effect pattern E6 includes the second special effect in the first to third parts, the first special effect in the fourth part, the second special effect in the fifth to seventh parts, and the first special effect in the eighth to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect.

In this way, by combining the first special performance and the second special performance to show one game round divided into a plurality of pseudo game rounds, the player has an impression as if the time reduction mode has been entered. can give

In the sixth special pattern table described in detail above, the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, in the sixth special pattern table, when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The sixth special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game round has been acquired, and when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly divided into the sixth special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

In the sixth special pattern table X, the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect patterns C6, D6 and E6 in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. set to be higher. The sixth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the performance patterns A6 and B6 is lower than that of the sixth special pattern table X, and the preferential treatment of the performance patterns A6 and B6 over other performance patterns is eliminated. It is

By adopting a configuration in which the first special performance is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game round when the previous game round and the subsequent game round are successively executed with the minimum interval time, the first special performance is achieved. 2. To prevent a player from having the impression that the occurrence of a special performance indicates the start of a game round, and to make the breaks between game rounds inconspicuous.

Returning to the description of FIG. 44 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if the total number of parts in the current game cycle is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, the seventh special pattern table stored in the ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The seventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1806, the seventh special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected seventh special pattern table.

The basic structure of the seventh special pattern table is the same as that of the fifth special pattern table, and the selection rate is such that the performance pattern with a large number of consecutive first special performances is more likely to be selected than the performance pattern with a small number of consecutive first special performances. There is a difference in The bias in the selection rate is greater than in the fifth special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn the opportunity to execute the first special effect. .

Returning to the description of step S1805, if a negative determination is made in step S1805, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the above-mentioned continuous counter is not 0), step S1807 In consideration of the flow from the previous game round, the production pattern (distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) in the main game round is determined. Specifically, in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140, an eighth special pattern table is stored according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the total number of parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1807, the eighth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the selected eighth special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

The basic configuration of the eighth special pattern table is the same as that of the sixth special pattern table, and the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, in the eighth special pattern table, when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The eighth special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game round has been acquired, and when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low-frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly divided into the eighth special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The eighth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the performance pattern in which the first special performance is performed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the performance pattern in which the second special performance is performed at the beginning. . The eighth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the performance patterns A6 and B6 in which the first special performance is executed at the beginning is lower than that of the eighth special pattern table X, and other performance patterns. has been abolished.

By adopting a configuration in which the first special performance is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game round when the previous game round and the subsequent game round are successively executed with the minimum interval time, the first special performance is achieved. 2. To prevent a player from having the impression that the occurrence of a special performance indicates the start of a game round, and to make the breaks between game rounds inconspicuous.

In addition, in the eighth special pattern table, as with the sixth special pattern, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects is more likely to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. ing. However, this selection rate bias is greater than in the sixth special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn the opportunity to execute the first special effect. It's becoming

After setting the effect pattern in the processes of steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, the effect setting process is executed in step S1808, and then the first setting process ends.

As already explained, in the special effect mode in the present embodiment, under the condition that the first special effect is repeated, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is arranged along the outer circumference of the display screen 253a. effect may be displayed. For this effect, there are a total of 6 colors, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the effect displayed during the pseudo-continuous change display in the normal production mode, and white < blue < yellow < green. It is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of <red>rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1808, whether or not to display the effect, the color of the effect, and its step-up pattern are determined based on the result of this game and the effect pattern determined in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may be continued to the main game round across the game rounds. Therefore, if the effect is inherited from the previous game round, it is decided whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher one, and if the color is to be updated, a step-up pattern to that color is set. decide. The step-up pattern also includes information on which part the effect is to be released and information on whether or not the effect is to be handed over to the next game round.

If the effect display is not taken over from the previous game round, or even if it is taken over, if the effect is canceled in the middle, it is decided whether or not to generate a new effect, and the effect color and step-up determine the pattern. Incidentally, the step-up timing of the effect is configured to be the timing when the temporarily stopped pattern starts to change again.

Returning to the description of the special effect setting process for complete failure in FIG. 43, if it is the final game round in the special effect mode, or if the subsequent hold information is not waiting but the effect is being generated, step S1708 After executing the second setting process, the special effect setting process for complete failure is terminated. Here, the second setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47 .

(Second setting process)
In the second setting process, first, in step S1901, the third special effect is set for the final part. The third special effect is a effect corresponding to the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 34(a)) executed in the time saving effect mode described above. Specifically, the display screen 253a darkens during the variable display to the fixed display in the game round related to the end of the special effect mode. Then, when the fixed display is completed, the darkening is canceled and the reduced display of the pattern is canceled, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal effect mode. The end suggestion effect is configured to occur even in game times other than the game times related to the end of the time saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a darkens during the variable display to the fixed display, the display in the time-saving effect mode is continued after the darkening is canceled with the end of the fixed display.

For the third special effect, data whose execution time matches the reference time (data whose execution time is 2 sec) among data for end suggesting effect stored in the display control device 410 is used. In the subsequent processing, production patterns are determined for the remaining parts.

After performing the process of step S1901, it progresses to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining parts excluding the final part is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, whether or not consideration should be given to the previous game flow.

If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the continuation counter is "0", that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the ninth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The ninth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1904, the ninth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the selected ninth special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

For example, if the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "3" and the number of remaining parts is "8" (the total number of parts is "9"), select the one corresponding to those conditions from each 9th special pattern table. do. Effect patterns A9, B9, C9, D9, and E9 are provided in the ninth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions (see FIG. 48(a)).

Production pattern A9 includes the first special production for the first to third parts, the second special production for the fourth to sixth parts, the first special production for the seventh to eighth parts, and the above-mentioned special production for the ninth part. 3 special effects are applied respectively, and the first special effect group is divided into the front and back by the second special effect. The third special performance is executed in the last part of the game round, the game round ends, and the special performance mode ends accordingly.

The effect pattern B9 includes the first special effect for the first part to the second part, the second special effect for the third part to the fifth part, the first special effect for the sixth part to the eighth part, and the third special effect for the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this production pattern B9, as shown in example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. The first special performance is performed three times and the third special performance is performed once before the game cycle ends. Due to the intervening second special performance, the number of continuous variations in the first half including the second special performance becomes "3", and the number of continuous variations in the second half including the third special performance becomes "3". Then, the special effect mode ends with the game round as a trigger.

The effect pattern C9 includes a first special effect for the first part, a second special effect for the second to fourth parts, a first special effect for the fifth part, a second special effect for the sixth to eighth parts, and a second special effect for the second to fourth parts. It has a configuration in which the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

The production pattern D9 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special production for the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect.

The production pattern E9 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth part, the second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, the first special production for the eighth part, and the second special production for the fourth part. It has a configuration in which the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

In the ninth special pattern table detailed above, the number of executions of the second special effect (occupancy rate of the part) in the effect patterns A9 and B9 is smaller than in the effect patterns C9, D9 and E9. is also set so that the effect pattern C9, D9, E9<the effect pattern A9, B9. This prevents the appearance frequency of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

Returning to the description of FIG. 47, when a negative determination is made in step S1903, when the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (when the continuous result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S1904. . In step S1904, the 10th special pattern table stored in the ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The tenth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the number of remaining parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1904, the tenth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the selected tenth special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the number of remaining parts is "8" (the total number of parts is "9"), and the continuous result from the previous game round is "1", select the one that meets those conditions. Effect patterns A10, B10, and C10 are provided in the 19th special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions (see FIG. 48(b)).

The production pattern A10 includes a first special production for the first part, a second special production for the second to fourth parts, a first special production for the fifth part, a second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and a second special production for the second to fourth parts. It has a configuration in which the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

The production pattern B10 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special production for the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect.

The production pattern C10 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth part, the second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, the first special production for the eighth part, and the first special production for the fourth part. It has a configuration in which the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts. In this production pattern C10, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the third special production is executed after the second special production and the first special production are alternately executed. Depending on the production, the number of continuous fluctuations in the opening stage is "2" including the second special production, the number of continuous fluctuations in the middle stage is "1" including the second special production, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the final stage is 3rd. It becomes "1" including special effects. Then, the special effect mode ends with the game round as a trigger.

As with the sixth special pattern table, the tenth special pattern table described in detail above has a configuration in which the selectivity of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, in the tenth special pattern table, when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The 10th special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game round has been acquired, and when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly divided into the 10th special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The tenth special pattern table X is arranged so that the selection rate of the performance pattern A10 in which the first special performance is performed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the performance patterns B10 and C10 in which the second special performance is performed at the beginning. is set. The tenth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern A10 is lower than that of the tenth special pattern table X.

By adopting a configuration in which the first special performance is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game round when the previous game round and the subsequent game round are successively executed with the minimum interval time, the first special performance is achieved. 2. To prevent a player from having the impression that the occurrence of a special performance indicates the start of a game round, and to make the breaks between game rounds inconspicuous.

Returning to the description of FIG. 47 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1902, that is, if the number of remaining parts in the current game cycle is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the 11th special pattern table stored in the ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The eleventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions, such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1907, the 11th special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the selected 11th special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

The basic structure of the eleventh special pattern table is the same as that of the ninth special pattern table. There is a difference in The bias in the selection rate is greater than in the fifth special pattern table, and even when the number of remaining parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn the opportunity to execute the first special effect. .

Returning to the description of step S1906, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the above-mentioned continuous counter is not 0), step S1908 In consideration of the flow from the previous game round, the production pattern (distribution pattern of the first special production and the second special production) in the main game round is determined. Specifically, in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140, a twelfth special pattern table is stored according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the number of remaining parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1908, the twelfth special pattern table corresponding to the current condition is selected, and the selected twelfth special pattern table is referenced to determine the effect pattern.

The basic configuration of the 12th special pattern table is the same as that of the 10th special pattern table, and the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, in the twelfth special pattern table, when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The twelfth special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game round has been acquired, and when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly divided into the 12th special pattern table Y that is referred to when the hold information related to the game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The twelfth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the performance pattern in which the first special performance is performed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the performance pattern in which the second special performance is performed at the beginning. . The twelfth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is lower than that of the twelfth special pattern table X. - 特許庁

By adopting a configuration in which the first special performance is likely to occur at the beginning of the subsequent game round when the previous game round and the subsequent game round are successively executed with the minimum interval time, the first special performance is achieved. The function is similar to that of the tenth special pattern table in that it suppresses the impression given to the player that the occurrence of the 2 special performance indicates the start of the game round and makes the break between the game rounds inconspicuous. is given.

In the twelfth special pattern table, as with the tenth special pattern, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. ing. However, this selection rate bias is greater than in the 10th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to gain an opportunity to execute the first special effect. It's becoming

After setting the effect pattern in the processes of steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the effect setting process is executed in step S1909, and then the second setting process ends.

The effect setting process in step S1909 is the same as the effect setting process in step S1809. Determine the color and its step-up pattern. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may be continued to the main game round across the game rounds. Therefore, if the effect is inherited from the previous game round, it is decided whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher one, and if the color is to be updated, a step-up pattern to that color is set. decide. The step-up pattern also includes information about which part the effect is to be released.

If the effect display is not taken over from the previous game round, or even if it is taken over, if the effect is canceled in the middle, it is decided whether or not to generate a new effect, and the effect color and step-up determine the pattern. Note that the second setting process determines the effect pattern of the final game round in the special effect mode, and all the displayed effects are canceled by the end of the game round.

According to the special effect mode detailed above, by dividing one game round into multiple times, it is possible to generate the same effect in the low frequency support mode as the effect mode (time saving effect mode) corresponding to the high frequency support mode. It has become. In the time-saving performance mode, the lottery mode may be a high-probability mode, and the chances of winning a big hit increase during the time-saving performance mode. In other words, the player's attention tends to be directed more easily than during the normal presentation mode. Therefore, the monotony of the game in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode can be suitably suppressed by making the special effect mode look as if the same effect as the time-saving effect mode is being performed. In view of the fact that games are often played in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, diversification of the effects in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode as described above will improve the interest of the game. effective in planning.

If the same effect as in the time-saving effect mode is executed in the special effect mode, the player's skill level, possessed knowledge, etc. may greatly change how the player perceives the effect. For example, in the case of a player who is not accustomed to the game, it is assumed that the special performance mode is the same performance mode as the time-saving performance mode by its appearance, and the above effect can be exhibited. In the case of a player who is familiar with the game, it is difficult to identify that the game state based on the special production mode and the time saving production mode are different in the first place, even if they look the same. It is assumed that no In addition, if the stored hold information includes information corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to shift to the special production mode compared to the case where the jackpot result is not included. If it has the composition which considers right/wrong information to the transition conditions to special production mode, divergence with expectation to special production mode and expectation to time reduction production mode can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the case of a player with a certain amount of knowledge, there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display that occurs in the normal production mode and the continuous fluctuation in the special production mode are the same. In the pseudo-continuous variation display, as the number of continuations increases, the degree of expectation for a big win increases dramatically. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 50, when the game round is divided into a plurality of parts and the first special effect is executed in all the parts, the behavior can be brought closer to the time saving effect mode, The number of continuous fluctuations increases greatly. In the pseudo-continuous variation display, when the number of times reaches 4, a super reach or higher is determined, and when the number of times reaches 6, a big win is determined. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive fluctuations in the special performance mode exceeds these thresholds, even if the number of consecutive fluctuations increases, it does not lead to a big win, which is a factor that increases the dissatisfaction of the player and reduces the desire to play. It is feared that In other words, in the case of realizing the same effect as the effect mode for the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode under the constraint of the effect mode for the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, misunderstandings by the players are suppressed. Ingenuity is required.

In this regard, in the special effect mode shown in the present embodiment, the end of the continuous variation is indicated by causing the first special effect group to intervene with the second special effect (seeing that the continuous variation is interrupted), thereby eliminating the above inconvenience. suppresses the occurrence of

In the notification/effect control device 140 that has acquired the variable display time information from the main controller 162, the variable display time is divided by the reference time. Then, by allocating the first special effect to the third special effect to each divided part, the effect pattern is determined. As for the first special effect, the same effect data as the effect executed in the time saving effect mode is diverted, and the amount of data related to the game effect is reduced.

In addition, although the variable display time can be set in various ways, if there are many conditions for determining the effect by calculating the number of parts by the above calculation and switching the table to be referenced based on the result In addition, it is preferable because it can promote sharing of data. For example, even if the variable display time is different, the same table can be referred to as long as the number of parts and various other conditions are the same. Therefore, it is more advantageous than the case where a table is provided for each variable display time.

Here, the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect are integral multiples of the execution time of the first special effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excess or shortage of time due to allocation of the first to third special effects. This is a preferable configuration for smoothing the flow of production.

It should be noted that the execution time of the third special effect is the same length (same time) as the execution time of the first special effect. Specifically, it is 2 sec, which is shorter than the sum of the shortest variable display time of 1 sec and the fixed display time of 2 sec during the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, if the variable display time for at least one part can be secured, it is possible to stop the continuation of the first special effect, and the third special effect interrupts the continuous variation and interrupts the continuous variation in any game round during the special effect mode. The end of the special presentation mode can be suitably executed. In addition, this third special effect is also useful for improving the degree of freedom of the effect pattern by cooperating with the previous game round and the subsequent game round.

In the time-saving performance mode, if the shooting of the game ball toward the right route is continued, each game cycle progresses in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the first special effect, both the variable display time and the temporary stop display time are set to 1 sec, and the execution time of the first special effect is matched to one game round in the time-saving effect mode. In this case, in a situation where the first special effect is repeated, the appearance becomes similar to the progress in the special effect mode, and the camouflage effect can be favorably exhibited. However, the fixed display time is 2 sec in the game round in the low-frequency support mode, which is longer than the fixed display time (1 sec) in the game round in the high-frequency support mode. For this reason, in the special effect mode, the effect of the interval between game rounds may cause a sense of discomfort in the flow of the effect. It is assumed that such a sense of incongruity becomes remarkable when the game round corresponding to the complete failure is repeated.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the game round corresponding to the complete loss, a part of the last set special effect is superimposed on the confirmation display. This makes it possible to make the interval appear shorter than it actually is. Specifically, the variable display times in the game times corresponding to the complete loss are all odd numbers, and are not divisible by the even reference time. A value obtained by subtracting this remainder from the reference time is shorter than the fixed display time. As a result, a base is constructed for using part of the fixed display time as time for special effects. In this way, by devising the length of the variable display time, the length of the reference time, and the length of the fixed display time, it is possible to solve the above problems without significantly changing the existing configuration. .

In the special performance mode, a second special performance intervenes in order to prevent the number of continuations from becoming excessive. About this production|presentation, it generate|occur|produces also in time reduction production|presentation mode. As shown in FIGS. 24(b) and 24(c), in the game round corresponding to complete loss, the number of the stored pending information corresponds to the second special effect (branch effect) regardless of the number of stored reservation information. A variable display time may be set. This prevents the second special effect from being conspicuous in the special effect mode.

In the time-saving performance mode, although the speed of digestion of game rounds is increased, there is a possibility that the progress of the game will become monotonous. Therefore, the reservation information related to the later game cycle is specified ahead, and the announcement effect (effect display) is executed based on the result, thereby suppressing the monotony of the effect. Here, in the special effect mode, effect display is executed according to the effect pattern in the game round. By executing the display effect similar to the time saving effect mode in this way, the divergence between the time saving effect mode and the special effect mode is suppressed.

In the special performance mode, the number of times the first special performance to the third special performance (unit display) are executed is stored, and the number of times the special performance (unit display) is executed is at least the minimum end criterion number of times in the high-frequency support mode. The special effect mode is maintained until the same number of times. This suppresses the divergence between the special production mode and the time saving production mode.

Various special pattern tables are configured so that the number of executions of the first special effect tends to increase. Since the occurrence rate of the branching effect is low even in the time saving effect mode, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by suppressing the occurrence of the second special effect.

Increasing the degree of freedom in setting the first special effect by cooperating with previous game rounds and later game rounds ensures as many opportunities for executing the first special effect as possible in a configuration in which an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times. preferred above.

<Second Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the time required for the ready-to-win display when the super ready-to-win D is executed in the special effect mode is fixed. In this embodiment, a plurality of available times (for example, long/short) are provided for the reach display, and one of these required times is selected each time a game is performed in which super reach D is performed. One of the characteristics is that The configuration relating to the special effect mode in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140 stores a ready-to-win display required time selection table that defines the required time to display the ready-to-win in the game round corresponding to the super reach D. In the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140, when the variation start command and the type command are received from the main control device 162, the game round to be executed this time is based on the variation display time information and winning/failure information included in those commands. Whether or not it corresponds to super reach D is specified, and if the current game round corresponds to super reach D, the required time (long/short) is determined by referring to the required time selection table. Note that the difference between these required times is set to be an integer multiple of the above-described reference time.

If the time required for the ready-to-reach display is different, the length of the remaining time excluding the time required for the ready-to-reach display will also differ even if the variable display time is the same. That is, the calculation result when calculating the number of parts in the special effect setting process for reach (step S1512) shown in FIG.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51, when "Long" is selected as the required time for the reach display (see example 2), the number of parts before the reach display is five, whereas the reach display When "Short" is selected as the required time (see Example 1), the number of parts before the ready-to-win display is six. That is, in "Short", which is likely to be selected when the result is a big win, there is one more part in which the first special effect can be executed than in "Long". Therefore, when "short" is selected as the required time, it is easier to secure an opportunity to execute the first special effect than when "long" is selected.

When the ready-to-win display is executed in the normal effect mode, the time required for the ready-to-win display is set to be longer in the variable display mode in which the degree of expectation for the big win is set higher. On the other hand, in the required time selection table for ready-to-win display described above, the required time for ready-to-win display is set to be shorter in the game rounds corresponding to the result of the big hit than in the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing. It has an easy configuration. That is, in the game times in which the super reach D is executed, in the case of the big hit result, the number of parts until the transition to the reach display tends to be larger than in the case of the losing result.

In the special effect mode, by increasing the number of parts before transitioning to the ready-to-win display, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in allocating the first special effect and the second special effect. As a result, it becomes easy to increase the number of continuous fluctuations until transition to the ready-to-win display, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the effect in the special effect mode can be exhibited more preferably.

<Third Embodiment>
In the special effect mode shown in the second embodiment, the time required for the ready-to-win display is determined based on the variable display time information and the success/failure information from the main control device 162 . In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the determination of the required time is partly different from the second embodiment.

Specifically, when determining the time required for the ready-to-win display in the special effect mode of the present embodiment, in addition to the variable display time information and the success/failure information from the main control device 162, the continuous result from the previous game round And the upper limit in the game round is referred to. In other words, in determining the time required for the reach display, the continuous results from the previous game round and the set upper limit are taken into consideration, that is, the reach display is based on them after specifying the continuous result and setting the upper limit. is determined by the required time.

More specifically, the required time selection table for ready-to-win display stored in the ROM 443 of the notification/production control device 140 includes variable display time information, win/fail information, continuous results from the previous game round, and the above upper limit in the game round. They are stored in association with various conditions. From these required time selection tables, the required time for reach display is determined from "short", "middle", and "long" by referring to the one corresponding to the current condition. As for "short", the number of parts that can execute the first special effect is increased by one compared to "middle". It is configured to be as many as possible.

For example, if the number of parts is halfway despite the fact that you want to earn the number of consecutive fluctuations following the reach display in the game round, an event may occur in which it is difficult to earn the number of consecutive fluctuations. Specifically, if the required time is set to "middle", the number of parts in the first section excluding the part for the second special effect (second section) before shifting to the ready-to-win display becomes "7", By applying the first special effect to all parts of the first section, the number of consecutive fluctuations following the ready-to-win display becomes "7", exceeding the upper limit of the number of consecutive fluctuations of "6". If the second special effect is set in the first section, such an inconvenience can be avoided, but the number of continuous fluctuations following the ready-to-win display is extremely reduced. In the required time selection table for reach display in the present embodiment, in such a case, the required time for reach display should be increased by one part, that is, the number of parts in the first section should be reduced by one. Long" is easy to be selected. More specifically, it is configured such that the selection probability increases in the order of "middle"<"short"<"long".

With the above detailed configuration, the number of continuous fluctuations is suppressed from being extremely small in the game times corresponding to the winning super reach D, and the number of continuous fluctuations becomes extremely large in the game times corresponding to the losing super reach D. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably embody the technical idea shown in the second embodiment that the number of continuous fluctuations can be set in a manner suitable for the situation.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, when determining the effect pattern in the special effect mode, the effect pattern in the previous game round (specifically, the continuous result) is taken into consideration. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, when determining the effect pattern, the effect pattern in the game round after the current game round is taken into consideration. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52 and the timing chart of FIG. 53, the configuration related to determination of the effect pattern in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, since the main configuration is common to the first embodiment, description of these common configurations will be omitted.

In the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, the setting process for cooperation is executed as part of the effect determination process (more specifically, the first setting process) for the special effect mode. The cooperation setting process is a process executed when the current game round is a game round corresponding to a complete loss and subsequent hold information has already been stored at the start of the game round. This processing is executed before the decision processing of S1804, S1806, and S1807.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the cooperation setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the next game round corresponds to the ready-to-win display. As already explained, the pending command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 140 includes variable display time information, success/failure information, etc., and the notification/production control device 140 stores this information in the Based on this, it is determined whether or not the next game round corresponds to the ready-to-win display. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the next game round corresponds to a complete loss, the setting process for cooperation ends.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, details of the effect pattern of the next game round are confirmed in step S2002. Specifically, the number of parts (the number of parts in the first section) until transition to the ready-to-win display in the next game round is calculated. In the following step S2003, the number of parts that make up the first section of the next game round is the substantial upper limit (that is, "6" if it corresponds to the jackpot result, is less than "5"). If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the link setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined by lottery whether or not cooperation between the current game round and the next game round is possible. If the cooperation with the next game round is not to be performed, a negative determination is made in step S2005, and the setting processing for this cooperation ends. If cooperation with the next game round is to be performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, and the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, the upper limit of the number of consecutive times across game rounds is set. After that, in step S2007, a special pattern table to be referred to in the current game round and the next game round is selected, and this cooperation setting process ends. In the decision processing of steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, when the special pattern table is selected in step S2007, the effect pattern is decided by referring to the special pattern table. Then, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the special pattern table selected in the same flow as in the first embodiment.

Here, with reference to FIG. 53, an example of an effect pattern when cooperation occurs will be described. At the timing tc1 during the fixed display, the ball enters the upper working hole 83a, and the number of stored pending information increases from "1" to "2". When the game round starts at the timing tc2, the variable display of the pattern on the display portion for the upper opening of the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 are started.

The game round corresponds to a complete loss, and the next game round corresponds to a big win. The variable display time for the next game round is 22 seconds, and the number of parts is "3" in the time (first section) excluding the ready-to-win display and the branch effect immediately before that. For this reason, the number of times that the first specific effect can be executed in the first section of the next game round is "3", that is, if the continuous variation is performed in the next game round alone, the reach display (branching effect) is included. The maximum number of continuous fluctuations is "3". For the next game round, it corresponds to the winning result, and the upper limit of the number of continuous fluctuations is substantially "6", so the number of parts in the first section is insufficient to perform continuous fluctuations for this upper limit. there is

When starting the game round at the timing of tc2, it is determined by lottery whether or not to cooperate with the next game round. The example in FIG. 54 illustrates the case where the lottery is won. In the game round started at the timing of tc2, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning, and the second special effect is executed at the timing of tc3 after that. After that, in the second half of the game round, the first special effect is executed twice in succession. The first special effect executed last ends after the final display of the pattern on the display unit for the upper operating port and the pattern on the pattern display device 253 is started at the timing of tc5.

When the next game round starts at the timing of tc6 immediately after the end of the first special effect, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operation opening and the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 are started again. At the beginning of the next game round, the first special effect is executed three times, and the number of consecutive first special effects becomes five times over the previous game round to the next game round. Then, at the timing of tc7, the second special effect as the branch effect is started, so that the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect becomes "5", and the display shifts to the ready-to-win display at the timing of tc8. The next game round corresponds to the result of the big win, and at the timing of tc9, the stop display (confirmed display) of the pattern corresponding to the result of the big win is started on the display unit for the operation port, and the big win is displayed on the pattern display device 253. The stop display (fixed display) of the symbol combination corresponding to the result is started.

In this way, if the outline of the effect pattern of the next game round is taken into account when determining the effect pattern of the previous game round, it is possible to relax the restriction on the number of consecutive fluctuations. If it becomes possible to earn the number of consecutive fluctuations in the next game round (one game round) alone, the number of consecutive fluctuations can be appropriately set according to the result of winning or losing.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode by executing the same production as the time saving production mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the special production mode in the low frequency support mode It was configured to suppress the monotony of the game in. As already explained, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time are shorter than in the low-frequency support mode, thereby speeding up the progress of the game. By using the special production mode, it is important to make the production in the special production mode and the production in the time reduction production mode resemble each other in order to make it look as if it suddenly shifted to the time saving production mode during the low frequency support mode. . Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment, by diverting the moving images and the like used in the special effect mode to the normal effect mode, it is technically possible to reduce the difference in appearance between the effects of both effect modes. it makes sense.

However, in the time-saving production mode and the special production mode, due to the difference in the game state that is the premise, the diversion of the production may cause a slight discomfort in appearance. A supplementary explanation of the cause of this discomfort will be given below with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. In FIG. 54, the time Ta related to the pattern display for the operating port display portion of the main display unit, the time Ta related to the pattern display for the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 (specifically, the variable display area ME and the reduced display area SE) is distinguished as Tb.

When the normal effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the pattern stop display time (fixed display time) Ta1 and the pattern display device 253 in the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 The final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb1 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) coincides with the timing of starting the stop display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating opening and the display screen 253a (variable display area ME). coincides with the final stop display start timing of the pattern in . That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

When the time-saving performance mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time and fixed display time of the patterns and patterns in each game round are shortened compared to the low-frequency support mode. However, in the same way as in the normal effect mode, the stop display time (confirmed display time) Ta2 of the pattern in the display portion for the operating port of the main display unit 87 and the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253 , the final stop display time (determined display time) Tb2 of the pattern matches, and the timing of starting the stop display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port and the timing of starting the final stop display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 match. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

On the other hand, when the special effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (fixed display time) Ta3 of the pattern in the display portion for the operation port of the main display unit 87 and The final stop display time (fixed display time) Tb3 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253 coincides, and Although the final stop display start timing of the pattern matches, the temporary stop display time Tb4 of the pattern in the pattern display device 253 matches the pattern and the fixed display time Ta2, Tb2 of the pattern in the time saving production mode. , are shorter than the fixed display times Ta3 and Tb3 of the pattern and the pattern in the special effect mode.

Therefore, during the special performance mode, the display on the pattern display device 253 becomes the same as the display in the time-saving performance mode under the situation where the first special performance is repeated during the variable display of the pattern, and the display contents on the pattern display device 253. It is difficult to identify the difference between the time saving production mode and the special production mode just by looking at the. Here, in the special effect mode, since the temporary stop display time Tb4 when performing the temporary stop display is shorter than the fixed display times Ta3, Tb3, the progress during the fixed display is slightly delayed compared to the time of the temporary stop. It will happen. In the first embodiment, as a countermeasure, the time for displaying a moving image using the character CP1 is set to 2 seconds, and when the moving image is displayed at the end of the game cycle, it overlaps with the fixed display time. By configuring as above, the occurrence of the above discomfort is suppressed. One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised to further reduce such harmonious feeling.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the fixed display time of the pattern in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is the same length as the fixed display time (1 sec) of the pattern in the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. It is set to be In other words, there is no difference between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode in terms of stop display time. In the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the stop display of the symbols and the stop display of the symbols are synchronized in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized during the special production mode, and the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are partially asynchronous during the normal production mode. is configured to be Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the normal effect mode, the pattern is displayed on standby (temporary stop display) on the effective line of the variable display area ME, and a predetermined standby time (this implementation In the form of (1), it is configured to shift to the confirmation display at the timing when 1 sec) has passed.

In the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, the standby display control process, which is the standby display process, is executed as part of the display control process (periodic process). The configuration relating to the standby display will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. FIG. 55(a) is a flowchart showing the standby display control process executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, FIG. 55(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the standby display, and FIG. 56 is the standby display. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

(Standby display control process)
As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the standby control process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not re-variation display is being performed. In this embodiment, in some of the game rounds corresponding to the result of the big hit, the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the losing result is displayed in a standby state, and the part of the pattern row is changed again, and the effective line is displayed at the time of the confirmation display. In some cases, a display (re-variation display) of switching the symbol combination stopped and displayed above to a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result may be performed. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not this re-varying display is being performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not standby display is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process advances to step S2103 to determine whether or not it is time to start standby display. In this embodiment, the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 determines whether or not to perform the standby display, and the information is transmitted to the display control device 410 . The MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140 determines whether or not the game cycle to be started corresponds to the ready-to-win display, and sets the standby display when it corresponds to the ready-to-win display. Moreover, when it corresponds to the complete disconnection, it is determined whether or not the standby display is possible based on the number of subsequent pending information. Specifically, when the number of subsequent pending information is less than a predetermined number (two in this embodiment), it is determined that the standby display is to be performed, and when the predetermined number is reached, the standby information is displayed. A judgment is made to the effect that display is not performed. That is, when the variable display time is greatly shortened by the number of pieces of subsequent pending information reaching a predetermined number, standby display is avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, this standby display control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, standby display start processing is executed in step S2104, and then this standby display control processing is terminated. In the standby display control process, the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the deviation is temporarily stopped on the effective line, and the temporarily stopped symbol group is swung in the scroll direction on the effective line.

Returning to the description of step S2102, if affirmative determination is made at step S2102, that is, if the standby display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2105. determine whether or not As described above, in the present embodiment, the standby display→re-fluctuation display is executed in part of the game times corresponding to the big win result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2106, it is determined whether or not it is time to start changing display again. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately before the confirmation display. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, this standby display control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the standby display control process is terminated after the re-variation display start process is executed in step S2106. In the re-fluctuation display start process, the scroll display of a part of the symbol rows is resumed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2105, when it is determined that the game round does not correspond to the re-variation display, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display time in the current game cycle has passed (the timing when the variation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, this standby display control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process advances to step S2109 to execute final stop display processing, and then terminate this standby display control processing. In the final stop display processing when the re-fluctuation display is not passed, the symbol combination that is in standby display (oscillating) on the active line is stopped as it is, and the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the deviation is displayed as the final stop display ( confirmation display).

Returning to the description of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is determined that the display is changing again, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display time in the current game cycle has passed (the timing when the variation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, this standby display control process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process advances to step S2109 to execute final stop display processing, and then terminate this standby display control processing. In the final stop display processing when the re-variation display is passed, the symbols being scrolled are displayed on the effective line so that the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result is stopped, and the symbol combination is displayed as the final stop display (confirmed display). ).

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the symbol display when the standby display occurs will be described. FIG. 56(a) exemplifies the case of going through the reach display, and FIG. 56(b) illustrates the case of not going through the reach display.

In FIG. 56(a), after the ready-to-win display, the standby display by the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is executed. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the activated line. When the current game round corresponds to the result of losing, the swinging of all the symbols is canceled at the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the start of the standby display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is released. A final stop display (confirmed display) is displayed on the effective line. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the result is a failure.

On the other hand, when the current game cycle corresponds to the result of a big win, the swing is canceled at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the standby display, and the middle pattern row is scrolled and activated. The symbol combination displayed on the line is changed from one corresponding to the loss result to one corresponding to the big win result. As a result, the player is clearly informed that a big win has been achieved.

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the hit reach display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result may be displayed as the final stop display (confirmed display) without going through the standby display, but the ratio is the standby display → replay. The number of symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result is larger than that of the final stop display through the variable display.

In FIG. 56(b), the standby display is executed by the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing without going through the ready-to-win display. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the activated line. When the current game round corresponds to the result of losing, the swinging of all the symbols is canceled at the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the start of the standby display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is released. A final stop display (confirmed display) is displayed on the effective line. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the result is a failure.

On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to the result of a big hit, the swing is canceled at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the standby display, and a part of the symbol row (for example, the upper The symbol row) is scrolled, and the symbol combination displayed on the effective line is changed from one corresponding to the loss result to one corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the player is clearly informed that a big win has been achieved.

Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In FIG. 57, similarly to FIG. 54, the time Ta related to the pattern display for the display portion for the actuation port of the main display unit, and the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 (specifically, the variable display area ME and the reduced display area SE) The time for symbol display is distinguished as Tb.

When the time saving effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, as shown in the center of FIG. The display time) Ta6 coincides with the final stop display time (determined display time) Tb6 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253, and the stop display start timing of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port. The final stop display start timing of the pattern in the pattern display device 253 matches. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

When the special effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, as shown on the right side of FIG. The display time) Ta7 coincides with the final stop display time (determined display time) Tb7 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the pattern display device 253, and the stop display start timing of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port. The final stop display start timing of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) matches. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

On the other hand, when the normal effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (fixed display time) Ta5 of the pattern in the display portion for the operation port of the main display unit 87 and The final stop display time (fixed display time) Tb5 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253 coincides, and Although the final stop display start timing of the pattern matches, the total stop display time TbX (2 sec) including the standby display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253 is longer than the fixed display times Ta5 and Tb5 (1 sec). It's becoming That is, in the symbol display device 253, the symbols are displayed in a standby state prior to the confirmation display, and the standby display extends the stop display time. By extending the stop display time by the standby display, it is possible to secure a certain length of the stop display time of the symbols. This is a preferable configuration for prompting the player to understand the game result.

Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb8 matches the fixed display times Ta7 and Tb7. Therefore, even when a game round is composed of a plurality of parts by the first special effect or the like, it is possible to prevent the boundary between game rounds from becoming conspicuous due to the difference between the temporary stop display time and the final stop display time. . In this way, if the existing configuration is used well, while suppressing the complication of the configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when performing the same performance as in the time-saving performance mode in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. can be suitably suppressed. In addition, while it is not necessary to switch the fixed display time according to the game state, the symbols can be stopped and displayed in a preferable manner according to the game state. .

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games executed in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode reaches a preset number, the transition to the special effect mode is performed. You may change the shift opportunity to special production mode as follows. That is, when a predetermined time condition is satisfied (for example, when the time elapsed in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode reaches a predetermined time or a predetermined time), it shifts to the special effect mode. may be configured. Moreover, it is possible to allow the selection operation of the production mode by the player, and to shift to the special production mode when the special production mode is designated by the selection operation. Moreover, it is also possible to use these various transition opportunities together.

(2) A plurality of types of the first special effects shown in the above embodiments may be provided. Specifically, as the first special performance, a first special performance A and a first special performance B having different degrees of expectation for a big win are provided, and when the ready-to-win display as a result of the big win is executed, the first special performance as a sign of it. The configuration is such that the first special performance B is easily set as the special performance, and the first special performance A is easily set as the first special performance when the ready-to-win display as a result of failure is executed or when the ready-to-win display is not executed. It is also possible to For example, regarding the girl character CP1 displayed in the first special effect, the color of the broom of the girl character CP1 is set to white in the first special effect A, and the color of the broom of the girl character CP1 is set to white in the first special effect B. It is better to differentiate by making the color red.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the allocation of the first special effect and the second special effect in the subsequent game round is determined in consideration of the number of continuous fluctuations across the game rounds. It is not limited. The special pattern table can be simplified by regulating the number of consecutive fluctuations to be "0" at the end of a game round to eliminate the influence on subsequent game rounds. However, in a situation where there is a lot of stored pending information (under a situation where the time saving function works greatly), if you try to complete the continuous variation in each game round, the game progresses at a good tempo. Deviation from the time saving production mode becomes larger. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which whether or not the restriction is permitted is determined according to the number of subsequent pending information. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display time is greatly shortened when the number of stored pending information is two or more, the above regulation is performed when the number of stored pending information is less than "2". , "2" or more, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the above regulation is not performed.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when a command corresponding to the lost reach is received during the special effect mode, the first special effect is performed at the time before the reach display shifts as a configuration for executing the lost reach display. Although the configuration is repeated, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when a command corresponding to the off reach is received during the special effect mode, the notification/effect control device 140 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the reach display. When the out-reach is not performed, the number of executions of the first special effect can be increased by dividing all the sections.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration in which the ready-to-win display is performed only once during one game has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. This does not deny the configuration in which the ready-to-win display is executed multiple times during one game round. In such a configuration, at least for the ready-to-win display executed before the final ready-to-win display, the result of failure may be notified.

(5) The execution time of the second special effect shown in each of the above embodiments is set to be longer than the execution time of the first special effect. Whether or not the length is set is arbitrary. For example, it may be the same length as the execution time of the first special effect, or may be shorter than the execution time of the first special effect.

Also, the execution time of the third special effect shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to be the same as the execution time of the first special effect, but how long is the execution time of the third special effect? It is arbitrary whether it is set as For example, it may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first special effect. However, in view of the point that the second special effect and the third special effect function as a stopper for stopping the continuation of the first special effect, it is preferable to make the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect different.

In addition, when determining the effect pattern by the notification / effect control device 140, the allocation of the first special effect to the third special effect is smoothed, and the occurrence of excess or deficiency with the variable display time is alleviated. Then, it is technically significant to make the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect integral multiples of the execution time of the first special effect set as the reference time.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the arrangement of the first special effect to the third special effect is determined at the start of the fluctuation, but after setting all the first special effects, some parts are changed to the second special effect. It is also possible to replace the second special effect and the third special effect at the start of the effect and the third special effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect pattern until the start of the second special effect or the third special effect. For example, by making it possible to change the performance pattern in consideration of subsequent hold information newly added after the start of the main game round, cooperation between previous and subsequent game rounds can be strengthened.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the first special effect in the special effect mode is configured to temporarily stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the complete failure, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the normal effect mode, the re-variation symbol combination (temporary stop symbol combination) may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which either the re-variation symbol combination or the completely lost symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to the game result or the like.

Even in the case of temporarily stopping and displaying the re-fluctuation symbol combination in the first special effect in the special effect mode, when the second special effect and the third special effect are executed in the middle of the game round. It is preferable to differentiate the game from the first special effect by temporarily stopping and displaying the completely lost symbol combination in the second special effect and the third special effect.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, various special pattern tables are configured so that the second special effect does not occur continuously for the purpose of gaining opportunities for the first special effect to occur. By changing this, it is also possible to construct various special pattern tables so that the second special effect can occur continuously. Similarly, it is possible to construct various special pattern tables so that the third special effect can occur continuously. Also, it is possible to configure various special pattern tables so that the second special effect and the third special effect can occur in succession. In addition, it does not deny the combination of these patterns.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the upper limit of the first consecutive number of times in the special effect mode is set in relation to the pseudo-continuous change display executed in the normal effect mode, but this is not the only option. not a thing The configuration may be such that the upper limit is set regardless of the pseudo continuous variation display. Also, the upper limit does not have to be a variable parameter, and can be a fixed parameter.

By the way, in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, the case where the super reach or more is confirmed by the number of consecutive times of 4, and the jackpot is confirmed by the number of consecutive times of 6, but in this way, depending on the number of consecutive times It is arbitrary whether or not to clarify the variable display mode and the game result. Also, the maximum number of times of continuation in the pseudo continuous variation display may be changed arbitrarily.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the effect display is performed as part of the advance notice effect across the game times during the time saving effect mode, and the effect display is performed even in the special effect mode, but such effect display can be omitted.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the effect display in the special effect mode may differ between the number of continuous fluctuations and the effect level, and the two do not necessarily match. It is also possible to have a configuration that matches the effect level with the effect level.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of shifting from the special effect mode to the normal effect mode via the third special effect was exemplified, but it is also possible to give the same function to the second special effect. . As a result, it is possible to increase the variations of the effect patterns defined by the ninth to twelfth special pattern tables and increase the chances of executing the first special effect.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, one type of execution time (2 sec) is used for the first special effect, but a plurality of execution times for the first special effect may be provided. Even in this case, it is preferable to consider the execution time of the game in the high-frequency support mode when setting the execution time. For example, in the first embodiment, as the variable display time when no reach occurs, 1 sec is set when the number of holds is 2 to 4, and 2 sec is set when the number of holds is 1. ing. In order to increase the execution time of the first special effect, the execution time of the additional first special effect is set to 3 seconds (variable display time of 2 seconds + temporary stop display time of 1 second) in consideration of the next shortest variable display time of 2 seconds + fixed display time of 1 second. It is preferable to

(14) In each of the above embodiments, in the time-saving production mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the special production mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the pattern is displayed in the reduced display area SE on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols are displayed in the variable display area ME as in the normal effect mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the number of parts (the number of times the first special effect can be executed) is specified by the calculation process of dividing the variable display time or the interval before the transition to the reach display by the reference time, and based on the specified result However, it is also possible to omit the arithmetic processing by storing a special pattern table corresponding to various variable display times. However, when special pattern tables are provided corresponding to various variable display times, it is difficult to share the special pattern tables and the number tends to increase, compared to the case where special pattern tables are provided depending on the number of parts. In particular, such a problem becomes conspicuous when the execution time of reach display differs even if the variable display time is the same (see, for example, the second embodiment). Storing the special pattern table according to the number of parts in this manner has technical significance in that it contributes to reduction of the amount of information stored in the notification/effect control device 140 .

(16) In the above first to fourth embodiments, the fixed display time during the low-frequency support mode is shorter than the fixed display time during the high-frequency support mode. is arbitrary. For example, the fixed display time during the low-frequency support mode and the fixed display time during the high-frequency support mode can be the same.

(17) In the above-described second embodiment, the configuration in which a plurality of required times for the ready-to-win display are provided when super ready-to-win D is executed in the special effect mode was exemplified, but the required time for the ready-to-win display is not limited to short/long, and is arbitrary. For example, there may be three of short/middle/long, or four or more.

In addition, regarding the game cycle in which the super reach D is executed, when compared with the same variable display time, a plurality of timings are provided from the start of the game cycle to the transition to the ready-to-win display, but the difference between these timings does not necessarily have to be the same length as the reference time. However, in order to make a difference in the number of continuous fluctuations executed before the ready-to-win display by securing the execution time of the first predetermined effect using the difference in timing, the difference is the first It is preferable to make it longer than the execution time (reference time) of the predetermined effect. As in the second embodiment, if this difference is set to be an integer multiple of the reference time, the smoothness of the performance flow will be impaired in terms of creating a difference in the number of times of continuous variation. can be suitably suppressed.

(18) In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition timing to the ready-to-win display in the next game round is determined in consideration of the performance pattern of the previous game round, but it is not limited to this. do not have. It may be configured to determine whether or not to consider the effect pattern of the previous game round according to the interval time from the previous game round. For example, when the next game round is started immediately after the previous game round ends (that is, when the hold information for the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round), the previous game round On the other hand, if the next game round is started with a gap from the end of the previous game round (that is, the hold information for the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round. If not), it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect pattern of the previous game round is not taken into consideration. It should be noted that the criterion for determining whether to consider or not to consider is not limited to interval period=0. The interval period used as the determination criterion may be arbitrarily changed as long as the player recognizes that the previous game round and the subsequent game round are continuously executed.

(19) In the fifth embodiment, the standby display is performed by swinging the symbols in the scroll direction. It suffices if it can be suggested, and the specific aspect of the standby display is arbitrary. For example, the design may be repeatedly enlarged/reduced on the active line, the design may be repeatedly changed between low and high transparency, or the design or the effects associated with the design may flash. (flash) may be used.

(20) In the time-saving production mode, the number of remaining games to be maintained in the high-frequency support mode is basically hidden, and in the special production mode, the number of remaining games to maintain the special production mode is not specified accordingly. Although explicitly stated, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which information corresponding to the remaining number of times is specified in each production mode. For example, a counter indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed on the display screen 253a. In the time-saving performance mode, the value of this counter is updated (for example, subtracted) in accordance with the completion of the game round, and in the special performance mode, the first special performance, the second special performance (reach display non-development), and the third special performance. The value of the counter may be updated (eg, decremented) each time various effects such as special effects are executed. As a result, the effect of making the special performance mode look like the time saving performance mode can be exhibited more preferably.

It should be noted that, as shown in the above embodiment, in the case where whether or not to end the special effect mode is determined by lottery, after the counter reaches "0", for example, when the special effect mode ends. It is preferable to display a message (for example, a message such as "WARNING") indicating that the situation is not strange.

It is also possible to configure the special effect mode to end when the value of the counter becomes "0" and prevent the above-described delay from occurring. Please devise the production pattern in the game round. For example, an event such that the counter value becomes "0" during a game cycle, that is, an event such as shifting to the normal production mode during a game cycle may occur, but in such a case the counter becomes "0". It is preferable to configure the part up to the first to third special effects corresponding to the special effect mode, and configure the part after reaching "0" by the effect corresponding to the normal effect mode.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the minimum number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is set to 10 times, but the minimum number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is pseudo-variation (first special effect to third It is optional as long as it is set to be greater than the maximum number of times that special effects, etc., can be executed. In each of the embodiments described above, in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the longest variation display time in the non-reach game is 17 seconds. In this variable display time, the number of parts is "9", and when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "3", the maximum number of pseudo-variation executions is seven. On the other hand, the longest fluctuation display time in the game rounds in which reach occurs is 28 seconds. In this variable display time, the number of remaining parts when considering the reach display time and the branch effect time is "6", and the maximum number of pseudo-variation executions when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "6" is 6 times becomes. In such a case, considering the former, it is preferable to set the above-described minimum number of continuations to 8 or more. In accordance with this, it is preferable to set the minimum number of continuations to 8 or more when shifting to the special effect mode from the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, a lower limit is set for the number of continuations of the special effect mode (the number of times the pseudo variation is executed), and after reaching this lower limit, whether or not to continue the special effect mode is determined by lottery. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of continuations of the special effect mode (the number of executions of the pseudo-variation) matches the candidate for the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, in each game cycle that results in a big win, the symbol combination corresponding to the big win is stopped (confirmed) after the ready-to-win display, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result is stopped (confirmed display) without going through the ready-to-win display in part of the game rounds resulting in the big win result. In such a configuration, in a game turn resulting in a big win, either the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result is displayed stop-displayed (fixed display) through the ready-to-win display, or the symbol combination corresponding to the big-win result is displayed without going through the ready-to-win display. may be configured to entrust the determination of whether to stop display (determine display) to the notification/production control device 140 . For example, when a game round that results in a big hit is executed during the special production mode, the number of times the first special production is executed in the game round executed before the corresponding game round (including at least the immediately preceding game round) ( That is, the number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the corresponding game round) is taken into consideration to determine whether or not to perform the reach display, and when it is decided to perform the reach display, the production pattern in the corresponding game round, that is, The number of executions of the first special effect may be determined in consideration of the number of times of execution of the first special effect in the previous game round (that is, the number of consecutive first special effects before the relevant game round).

(24) In the configuration in which the first special effect is continued across the game rounds by cooperation between the previous game round and the subsequent game round, during the interval between the two game rounds, based on the establishment of the predetermined avoidance condition, It is also possible to adopt a configuration that avoids cooperation between both game rounds, for example, a configuration that does not consider the effect pattern of the previous game round when determining the effect pattern in the later game round. The predetermined avoidance conditions include, for example, that the gaming machine is turned off, that the control mode of the gaming machine is switched to a power saving mode that consumes less power than normal, and that the symbol display device 253 shifts to demonstration display. and at least one of displaying a menu for adjusting the volume or the like based on the player's operation. When the game is substantially interrupted, the effect pattern of the previous game round is not taken into consideration, so that the degree of freedom in setting the effect pattern in the subsequent game round can be preferably improved.

(25) When the first special effect is repeated with the second special effect and the third special effect intervening, the number of consecutive first special effects before the second special effect and the third special effect A correlation may be given to the number of consecutive times of one special effect. For example, when determining the number of consecutive times of the first special effect in the game round corresponding to the result of the big win, the ratio of the effect pattern that matches the previous number of consecutive times is higher than the ratio of the effect pattern that does not match. A performance pattern in which a difference is provided so as to be higher, and a ratio of the performance pattern to be matched with the previous number of continuations is matched when determining the number of continuations of the first special performance in game rounds not corresponding to the result of the big win. It is also possible to provide a difference so as to be lower than the ratio of . In the case of such a configuration, if the difference is increased and the result of the big win is confirmed or the expectation of the result of the big win is high when the subsequent number of consecutive times and the previous consecutive number of times match. good.

(26) In the special production mode, the production pattern for the game round is determined at the start of the game round. A configuration in which patterns are collectively determined is also possible. For example, when the suspension information is newly stored in the special performance mode, the performance pattern of each game cycle related to the suspension information and the suspension information stored before it may be collectively determined. . If the above configuration is applied to the configuration in which the special effect is executed across a plurality of game rounds as shown in each of the above embodiments, it can contribute to the optimization of the effect pattern.

(27) In a configuration in which the degree of expectation of a big win result increases as the number of consecutive first special effects increases, it is preferable to provide a branching effect as to whether or not the first special effect continues. That is, an effect pattern in which the number of consecutive first special effects is inherited across the branch effect and an effect pattern in which the number of consecutive first special effects is not inherited across the branch effect may be provided. With such a configuration, when the first special effect is repeated, the first special effect can be divided into the front and back by intervening the branch effect, so even if the first special effect is repeated, the first special effect can be divided. It is possible to suitably suppress the number of consecutive times from becoming excessively large.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, as part of the display effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped) before the final display. In a part of the round, before the symbol combination is confirmed and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the big hit (for example, the symbol combination to be confirmed and displayed in the main game round) is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped). is also possible. For example, in a part of the notification of the big winning result through a plurality of first special performance → second special performance → third special performance, at least one of the plurality of first special performances corresponds to the big winning result. The symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed in this game round) may be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped).

(29) If information such as success or failure in the subsequent game round is specified before the subsequent game round is started, the final stop is made in the game round executed before the subsequent game round. The symbol combination (symbol combination to be definite displayed) may be determined in consideration of the specific result. For example, if the subsequent game round corresponds to the big win result, the symbol combination that is finally stopped in the previous game round (corresponding to the loss result) is determined to be the big win result in the subsequent game round. It is preferable to use a combination of symbols suggesting or clarifying.

Further, as shown in the modification (26), when the effect pattern of a plurality of game rounds is determined collectively, information such as the success or failure of the game round to be executed last among the plurality of game rounds is obtained. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbol combination, etc. of the game cycle to be executed earlier (for example, the symbol combination to be finally stopped or the symbol combination to be temporarily stopped) is determined in consideration.

(30) The number of times the ready-to-win display is executed during one game round is arbitrary, and it is also possible to configure the ready-to-win display to be executed a plurality of times. In this way, when the ready-to-win display is executed a plurality of times during one game round, the number of times of the first special effect to be executed until the development timing to each ready-to-win display or the development timing to each ready-to-win display is changed according to the game round. A configuration may be employed in which patterns are stored according to display time (for example, stored as an effect pattern table), and which effect pattern is selected from among these patterns. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessively large when determining the effect pattern, while strengthening the effect function by giving correspondence to the front and rear ready-to-win displays.

For example, as shown in the above modification (17), short, middle, and long are provided as the time during which the reach display is executed, and when a difference is provided in the execution time of the reach display, the jackpot result is determined depending on the length of time. It is also possible to change the degree of expectation. When combining such a configuration with the configuration shown in this modified example, the combination of the previous reach display and the subsequent reach display is configured to change the degree of expectation of the jackpot result, and the cooperation between the front and rear reach displays is made. should be strengthened. Specifically, it is preferable that the degree of expectation for a big win result changes depending on how the length and type of the previous ready-to-win display and the length and type of the subsequent ready-to-win display are combined. For example, if the length of the first reach display is set to long with relatively high expectations, and the length of the reach display after is set to be short with relatively low expectations, then other combinations and It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation of a big winning result is extremely high in comparison. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, not only the number of consecutive first special effects, but also the relationship between ready-to-win displays performed a plurality of times will change the degree of expectation for the result of a big win, and increase the degree of attention to the game. Further improvement can be expected.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/production control device 140 and the display control device 410 are provided separately, but one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 140 and 410 may be provided. .

(32) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters the machine to give a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as the payout of medals when a specific pattern or a specific pattern combination is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reels have stopped. Applicable.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The following characteristic group A is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the structure of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature A1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (main control unit) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result (jackpot result) corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function of executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the device 162;
It is assumed that one game cycle is that the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function of executing game turn control processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of main display unit 87) so that on the machine,
The game round control means includes a period determining means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162). has
Effect execution means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification/effect control device 140 execute variable display control processing for executing effects in parallel with the game spin motion when the game spin motion is performed. function),
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided,
Based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game round is specified, and the game round is determined based on the specified result. A game machine characterized by comprising an execution number determination means (a function of determining the performance pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / performance control device 140) for determining the number of times the predetermined performance is executed.

According to the feature A1, for example, the predetermined effect is repeated within a possible range during the corresponding game round. In game machines, it is common to set various operation periods for reasons such as suppressing monotony of games. According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined effect after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, the predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with various operation periods. As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 performs the winning process for the operation opening function to be executed), acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Grant determination means for determining whether or not it corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player (function to execute processing such as winning lottery by MPU 402 of main control unit 162) Then, the end of the game-playing motion after the start of the game-playing motion is regarded as one of the game-playing times when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means is obtained. In a gaming machine provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game turn control means is It has a period determining means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for determining the operation period of the game round operation for each game round, and the game round operation is performed. Effect executing means (function for executing variable display control processing by the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for executing the effect when it is present, and one of the effects executed by the effect executing means As one, a predetermined effect is provided in which the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. and execution number determination means for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect to be executed during a game round (a function of determining the effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification and effect control device 140). ." is also possible.

Feature A2. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (main control unit) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result (jackpot result) corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function of executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the device 162;
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of the main display unit 87) so that the on the machine,
The game round control means includes a period determining means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162). has
Effect execution means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification/effect control device 140 execute variable display control processing for executing effects in parallel with the game spin motion when the game spin motion is performed. function),
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided,
Based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times specifying means (notification and effect control device 140) for specifying the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game round A function of calculating the number of parts in the MPU 442 of the
Based on the identification result by the number of times identification means, the number of times of execution determining means for determining the number of times of executing the predetermined effect during the game round (function of setting the effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A2, for example, the predetermined effect is repeated within a possible range during the corresponding game round. In game machines, it is common to set various operation periods for reasons such as suppressing monotony of games. According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined effect after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, the predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with various operation periods. As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect can be favorably exhibited.

Feature A3. Characteristic A1 or Characteristic A2, wherein the number of times of execution determination means is configured to determine the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect based on the operation period, the effect execution period, and the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine described in .

By determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the determination result by the provision determination means, it is possible to provide a relationship between the determination result and the number of executions. For example, by creating a difference in the number of executions between the case of the grant correspondence result and the case of the non-grant correspondence result, it is possible to suggest the determination result or the like by means of a predetermined effect. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature A1 and the like can be favorably exhibited.

Feature A4. The execution count determination means
Setting means for setting the upper limit number of times (for example, the first consecutive number of times) based on the determination result by the grant determination means (function for setting the upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140);
Limiting means for limiting the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect so that the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect does not exceed the upper limit number of times (function of limiting the number of consecutive times by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that

In a configuration in which the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined according to the operation period as shown in feature A1 and the like, the longer the operation period is, the more times the predetermined effect is executed. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of times of execution becomes excessively strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the result of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times is set based on the result of grant determination, and the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined within a range that does not exceed the upper limit number of times, the predetermined effect is temporarily executed Even if the possible number of times is large, the actual number of times of execution can be limited by the limiting means, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. The effect execution means is configured to suggest the degree of expectation, which is the result of the given response, according to the number of executions when the predetermined effect is continuously executed,
The execution count determination means
Setting means for setting the upper limit number of times (for example, the first consecutive number of times) based on the determination result by the grant determination means (function for setting the upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140);
Limiting means for limiting the number of executions of the predetermined effect so that the number of times the predetermined effect is continuously executed does not exceed the upper limit number of times (function for limiting the number of consecutive times by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by having:

In the configuration in which the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined according to the operation period as shown in feature A1 and the like, the longer the operation period is, the more the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect is increased. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of times of execution becomes excessively strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the result of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times is set based on the result of grant determination, and the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect is determined within the range that does not exceed the upper limit number of times, the predetermined effect is temporarily executed Even if the possible number of times is large, the number of consecutive times can be adjusted by the limiting means so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

It should be noted that ``~ when the predetermined effect is continuously executed~'' means that the predetermined effect is executed again after the predetermined effect is completed, that is, another effect (for example, a second predetermined effect described later) intervenes. This includes the case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed without performing.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect,
As one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect) different from the first predetermined effect is provided,
The limiting means executes the second predetermined effect when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times, so that the number of times the first predetermined effect is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that it is configured to limit the

According to this feature, by interposing the second predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect is limited so as not to exceed the upper limit number of times. In the configuration in which the degree of expectation for the result of the given response is suggested by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, the second predetermined effect is used to prevent the continuation of the first predetermined effect, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game. It is also possible to inform the player intelligibly that the continuation of the first predetermined performance has ended.

The second predetermined effect includes, for example, a ready-to-win effect and a branching effect to determine whether or not to develop into a ready-to-win effect.

By the way, it is also possible to apply the technical idea described above to the feature A4. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect, and as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, a second predetermined effect (for example, the first predetermined effect) different from the first predetermined effect 2 special performance and 3rd special performance) are provided, and the limiting means executes the second predetermined performance when the number of times the first predetermined performance can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that it is configured to limit the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed by doing so.

Feature A7. The limiting means executes the first predetermined effect before the second predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. A gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that it has means for separating what is executed and what is executed later.

By adopting a configuration in which the second predetermined effect is interposed in the first predetermined effect group, it is possible to prevent the number of executions of the first predetermined effect from becoming excessively small and to prevent the number of consecutive times from increasing.

In addition, as shown in features A6 and A7, when the second predetermined effect is executed in a period in which the first predetermined effect can be executed, for example, a part of the first predetermined effect group is processed by the second predetermined effect. It is good to set it as the structure to replace.

Feature A8. As a mode in the case of intervening the second predetermined effect, the limiting means is configured such that the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect. A first mode in which the number of consecutive first predetermined effects is greater than the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect, and a second state in which the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect. and a second mode that is less than the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect, and when the determination result by the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the second predetermined mode is performed in the second mode rather than the first mode. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that it is constructed so as to frequently intervene performances.

When the first predetermined effect group is divided into the front and rear by the second predetermined effect in the game round corresponding to the grant determination result, the number of consecutive first predetermined effects after the second predetermined effect tends to increase. , the expectation of the player can be suitably increased in the process of moving toward the notification of the award correspondence result. If the number of consecutive first predetermined effects can be increased as much as possible (within a limit range) in the part following the notification of the grant correspondence result, the player's attention toward the notification increases while diversifying the effects. can be encouraged to do so.

Feature A9. The limiting means is configured to intervene the second predetermined effect more often in the first mode than in the second mode when the determination result by the grant determination is not the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that

When the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and rear by the second predetermined effect in a game round not corresponding to the grant determination result, the number of consecutive first predetermined effects before the second predetermined effect tends to increase. , the effect shown in the feature A8 can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A9, wherein the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect.

As shown in feature A6 or the like, in order to limit the number of first predetermined effects (continuous number of times) using the second predetermined effect, as shown in this feature, the execution period of the second predetermined effect is set to the first predetermined effect. The following effect can be expected by setting the execution period to an integral multiple (×1, 2, 3, . . . ). In other words, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the influence of the intervention of the second predetermined performance on the first predetermined performance, the execution period of which should have been secured, and the first predetermined performance not being executed well. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of redoing of the specified number of times and the production layout, etc., because the result specified in advance cannot be diverted. This is preferable in terms of facilitating the progress of the presentation.

Feature A11. A related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / production control device 140) that stores information about the execution status of the predetermined production executed by the production execution means,
When the performance in the game round before the current game round ends with the predetermined production, the limit means sets the number of times the predetermined production is continuously executed from the previous game round to the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A10, further comprising special limiting means for limiting the number of executions of the predetermined effect so as not to exceed .

In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly executed during a game round, there is a possibility that the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round and the predetermined effect executed in the subsequent game round may appear to be continuous. be. Therefore, when the predetermined performance is executed at the end of the previous game round, the number of consecutive times including the predetermined performance does not exceed the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined performance continues beyond the limit. You can suppress the appearance of being there. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the player's confusion.

In addition, in the combination with the features A6 to A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature may be replaced with the "first predetermined effect".

Feature A12. The special restriction means applies the restriction when an interval period from the end of the predetermined performance in the previous game round to the start of the predetermined performance in the current game round does not exceed a reference period. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that it is configured to perform.

When the predetermined effects are performed in each of the preceding and following game rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous depends on whether the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game round and then in the next game round. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of Therefore, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which the above restriction is performed when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, the effect shown in feature A11 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature A13. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of pieces of special information obtained by the information obtaining means,
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
Characteristic feature A11, characterized in that the special restriction means is configured to perform the restriction when the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the previous game round ends. game machine.

When the predetermined effects are performed in each of the preceding and following game rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous depends on whether the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game round and then in the next game round. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of Therefore, as shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature A11 is achieved by adopting a configuration in which the above restriction is performed when special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the end of the previous game round. It becomes possible to exhibit it suitably.

Feature A14. A related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / production control device 140) that stores information about the execution status of the predetermined production executed by the production execution means,
The number-of-executions determination means determines the number of executions of the predetermined performance in the current game round based on the specified result and the execution status of the predetermined performance in the game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by:

If it becomes possible to associate the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round when executing the predetermined effect in the current game round, the occurrence pattern of the predetermined effect is compared with the case where the current game round is performed alone. can be diversified and the degree of freedom in setting predetermined effects can be improved. Using the predetermined effect in the previous game round in this manner is advantageous in that the predetermined effect increases the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in the combination with the features A6 to A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature may be replaced with the "first predetermined effect".

Feature A15. The execution count determining means determines that the interval period from the end of the predetermined effect in the previous game round to the start of the predetermined effect in the current game round is a reference period (for example, the same time as the fixed display time: 2 sec), the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the specified result and the execution status of the predetermined effect in the game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that

When the predetermined effects are performed in each of the preceding and following game rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous depends on whether the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game round and then in the next game round. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of Therefore, as shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature A14 can be favorably exhibited by adopting a configuration in which the game times are linked when the interval period does not exceed the reference period.

Feature A16. The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of pieces of special information obtained by the information obtaining means,
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
If the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the time the previous game round ends, the execution count determining means determines whether the specified result and the predetermined number in the game round before the current game round are stored. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the execution status of the effect.

When the predetermined effects are performed in each of the preceding and following game rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous depends on whether the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game round and then in the next game round. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of Therefore, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which cooperation between game rounds is attempted when special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round, It is possible to suitably exhibit the effect.

Feature A17. information corresponding to a determination result in the case where the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is subject to the provision determination, at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the provision determination; Equipped with destination identification means to identify in
The number-of-executions determining means determines the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the game round before the game round to be specified by the destination specifying means, based on the result of specifying by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A16.

If the predetermined effect is repeated in one game round alone, it is assumed that the restrictions on the number of executions of the predetermined effect, the number of consecutive times, and the like become stronger. For example, if the game round that is the target of the first specification corresponds to the award correspondence result, even if you try to increase the number of executions of the predetermined effect, there may be cases where a sufficient number of executions cannot be secured depending on the operation period of the game round. can occur. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when determining the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect in the game round before the game round (current game round) that is the target of the previous specification, the game that is the target of the previous specification By adopting a configuration that takes into account the destination-specifying information related to the round, it is possible to realize cooperation between the previous and subsequent game rounds, and to prepare in advance for, for example, the above-described shortage of the operation period.

Feature A18. The destination specifying means includes means for specifying the operation period of the game round related to the predetermined special information, and the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the game round related to the predetermined special information based on the operation period. and means for identifying
The effect executing means executes the predetermined effect at least at the end of the current game round when the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the game round related to the predetermined special information is less than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized by having:

As shown in feature A18, when the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the subsequent game round is less than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect is executed at least at the end of the current game round. It is possible to make the number of times of the predetermined effect executed in the game rounds from 1 to the game rounds after the game round close to the predetermined number of times.

Feature A19. The information acquiring means acquires the special information based on the ball entering the ball entering section,
As game states, a first game state (low-frequency support mode) and a second game state (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the ball into the ball-entering section than the first game state are provided.
The operation period (variable display time) and the notification period (fixed display time) of the game-playing motion are configured to be shorter in the second game state than in the first game state,
The effect execution means has a variable display means (symbol display device 253) for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen (display screen 253a), and a variable display for variably displaying a pattern on the display screen as the predetermined effect. and a stop display that stops and displays the pattern through the variable display,
A pattern variable display period in the predetermined effect matches an operation period in the second game state, and a pattern stop display period in the predetermined effect matches the notification period in the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, by changing the progress speed of the game between the first game state and the second game state, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game. In addition, in the first game state, it is possible to artificially change the progress speed of the game while maintaining the game state, which contributes to suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature A20. In the second game state, the variable display of the pattern is started in accordance with the start of the game-playing motion on the display screen, and after the variable display of the pattern is maintained until the game-playing motion is finished, the granting is performed. The pattern corresponding to the result of the grant determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed,
The effect executing means, as means for stopping and displaying the pattern in the predetermined effect, means for stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined effect is executed corresponding to the end of the game cycle. and means for stop-displaying a pattern that does not correspond to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined effect is executed corresponding to a time other than the end of the game cycle. game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the same pattern display as in the second game state can be reproduced in the first game state. That is, even if the game state remains the first game state, the appearance can be made to look as if it is in the second game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the progress speed of the game is changing in a pseudo manner without changing the game state, which contributes to suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A19 or feature A20, wherein the predetermined effect is the same effect as a game round effect executed in each game round in the second game state.

As shown in this feature, if the game round effect in the second game state is diverted to the predetermined effect, the effect of simulating the second game state can be exhibited more preferably.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature B1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (big win information) function) and
The game state is changed to a special game state (e.g., opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than normal, based on the fact that the result of determination by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. Game state transition means for transition (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 402 of main control device 162);
Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying a combination of patterns corresponding to the determination result after performing a variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen,
When the result of determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, a predetermined pattern combination (symbol combination corresponding to the big win result) corresponding to the transition correspondence result before transition to the special game state is the above. A gaming machine that is statically displayed on a display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined pattern combination, and at least some of the patterns are being variably displayed. A special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) that shifts to a certain reach state is provided,
As a display effect executed before entering the ready-to-win state in the game round corresponding to the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect execution period is shorter than the shortest period until the ready-to-win state is entered. Has a production (for example, the first special production),
The display control means is
The number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game round is specified based on the period until transition to the ready-to-win state in the game round corresponding to the special variable display mode and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. , an execution count determining means (a function of determining the performance pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / performance control device 140) that determines the number of times the predetermined performance is executed in the game round based on the specified result;
Before entering the ready-to-win state, there is an effect executing means (a function of executing the first special effect by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the predetermined effect based on the determination by the execution count determining means. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to feature B1, the number of times that a predetermined effect can be executed before transitioning to the ready-to-win state is specified based on the period until the transition to the ready-to-win state and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, and a predetermined number is specified based on the specified result. The number of executions of the production is determined. As a result, the predetermined effect is repeated within a possible range, for example, before transitioning to the ready-to-win state. Gaming machines are generally configured to shift to the ready-to-win state at various timings for reasons such as suppressing the monotony of the game. According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined effect after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined transition timing to the ready-to-win state. A predetermined effect can be repeatedly executed in accordance with the state of transition to a ready-to-win state. As a result, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect can be favorably exhibited.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the effect executing means is configured to indicate the degree of expectation for shifting to the ready-to-win state based on the number of executions of the predetermined effect.

The number of executions of the predetermined effect is related to the transition to the ready-to-win state. In such a configuration, the degree of attention of the player tends to be directed toward the predetermined effect. Here, if it is possible to respond to transition timings to various ready-to-win states by combining with the feature B1, it is possible to preferably exhibit the suggestive function by the predetermined effect. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. The display control means is configured to indicate the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result, by the number of executions when the predetermined effect is continuously executed,
As the special variable display modes, a first special variable display mode and a second special variable display mode having a longer period until transition to the reach state than the first special variable display mode are provided,
When the result of determination by the determination means is the result corresponding to transition, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode, and the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode when there is no corresponding result.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the case of the transition correspondence result, the period until transition to the reach state tends to be longer than in the case of not the transition correspondence result, and it is possible to increase the number of executions of the predetermined effect. Become. On the other hand, when it is not a transition correspondence result, the period until transition to the ready-to-win state tends to be short, and the number of executions of the predetermined effect is reduced. According to this configuration, as the number of executions of the predetermined effect increases, the possibility of the result corresponding to transition increases, and as the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect decreases, the possibility of the result corresponding to transition decreases. A relationship is provided between the result of transition determination and the number of executions of the predetermined effect.

Feature B4. The difference between the period until transition to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the period until transition to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is the effect execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature B3, which is configured to be an integral multiple of the period.

By setting the difference in the transition timing to the ready-to-win state to an integral multiple (×1, 2, 3, etc.) of the performance execution period of the predetermined performance, the execution period of the predetermined performance can be secured by the difference, It is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration in achieving differentiation between the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode while facilitating the progression of the presentation.

Feature B5. The display control means has transition timing determination means for determining the transition timing to the reach state based on the determination result of the transition determination means,
Characteristic B1 to Characteristic B4, characterized in that the number-of-executions determination means is configured to specify a period until transition to the reach state based on the transition timing determined by the transition timing determination means. The game machine according to any one of.

It is preferable to set the transition timing to the ready-to-win state in various ways in order to suppress the monotony of the game presentation and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, if the transition timing is diversified, the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed may also be diversified accordingly. Therefore, as shown in feature B4, in the configuration in which the transition timing to the reach state is determined based on the transition determination result, the period until transition to the reach state is specified based on the result, and the specified result A configuration that is practically preferable can be realized by determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the performance.

Feature B6. The execution count determination means is a first execution count determination means,
The number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game cycle is specified based on the period until the game cycle ends in the game cycle not corresponding to the special variable display mode and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. , a second execution count determining means for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the game round based on the identification result,
The effect execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the determination by the first execution frequency determination means and the determination by the second execution frequency determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature B6, in game rounds that do not shift to the ready-to-win state, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined based on the execution period of the game round and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. By adopting a configuration in which a predetermined effect is executed even in game rounds that do not shift to the ready-to-win state, it is possible to contribute to an increase in attention to the game for players who expect to shift to the ready-to-win state.

In addition, when applying the technical idea shown in feature group A, it is also possible to replace the "second execution count determination means" shown in this feature with the "execution count determination means" shown in feature group A. .

It is also possible to apply each technical concept shown in the characteristic group A to the characteristic group B detailed above.

<Characteristic group C>
The following characteristic group C is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature C1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Giving determination means (main A function of executing processing such as a winning lottery at the MPU 402 of the control device 162);
It is assumed that one game cycle is that the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function of executing game turn control processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of main display unit 87) so that on the machine,
The game round control means is a period determining means for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162). has
Effect executing means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification/effect control device 140 execute variable display control processing for executing effects in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed. function),
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a second 3 special performance) is provided, and when the first predetermined performance is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined performance, the degree of expectation, which is the result of the given response, is suggested by the number of times the first predetermined performance is performed. It is configured to
When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game round, the effect executing means performs the first predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. 2. The game machine is characterized by having a means for dividing into a first predetermined performance executed before the predetermined performance and a first predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance.

In the configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of the grant correspondence, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, there is concern that the deviation between the degree of expectation suggested by the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect and the actual game result will become large. be. Here, it is possible to simply not perform the first predetermined effect, or to replace the beginning or the end of the first predetermined effect group with the second predetermined effect, but in such a configuration, the first predetermined effect is performed. The production effect will not be displayed well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is intervened and the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and rear, it is possible to suppress excessive reduction in the number of opportunities to execute the first predetermined effect. , it is possible to suppress the number of continuations from becoming excessively large. Thereby, the divergence can be suppressed while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. Therefore, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the first predetermined effect can be exhibited favorably.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 performs the winning process for the operation opening function to be executed), acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main controller 162), and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Grant determination means for determining whether or not the information corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player (function for executing processing such as winning lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) ), and the termination of the game-playing motion by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means after the game-playing motion is started is regarded as one game-playing. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of the main display unit 87) so that the operation is performed. game machine, the game round control means includes period determination means for determining the operation period of the game round operation for each game round (function for executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162). ), and effect execution means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification / effect control device 140) for executing an effect in parallel with the game action when the game action is performed. function of executing display control processing), and a first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second Two predetermined effects (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect) are provided, and the effect execution means executes the first predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game round. By interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effect to be executed before the second predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect to be executed after the second predetermined effect A game machine characterized by having a means for dividing into." is also possible. It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the following features C2 to C11 to this configuration.

Feature C2. The effect executing means has means for setting an upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect based on the determination result by the provision determining means, and intervenes the second predetermined effect when the upper limit can be reached. The first predetermined effect is divided into a first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect and a first effect executed after the second predetermined effect by causing the second predetermined effect to be performed. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

By setting an upper limit for the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined performance according to the result of grant determination and intervening the second predetermined performance when the upper limit is exceeded, the first predetermined performance is divided into, for example, the first half and the latter half. By dividing, it is possible to preferably prevent the first predetermined effect from being excessively repeated in a manner that is inconsistent with the result of the grant determination.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the second predetermined effect is set such that the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect. .

If the first predetermined effect group is simply to be interrupted by the second predetermined effect, the interruption of the second predetermined effect may cause an excess or deficiency in the effect period. This can be a factor that impairs the smoothness of the production progress. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect can be executed instead of the predetermined number of the first predetermined effects. Therefore, the excess and deficiency can be suppressed. As a result, the smoothness of the performance progress can be ensured.

Feature C4. As a setting mode for setting an intervening part of the second predetermined effect when the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and rear by the second predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is performed. A first setting mode in which the number of times is greater than the number of first predetermined effects to be executed later, and a first predetermined effect to be executed after the number of times of the first predetermined effects to be executed before the second predetermined effects. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising a second setting mode in which the number of games is less than the number of games.

When the second predetermined performance is intervened, the intervention point is shifted forward, so that the number of times of the first predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance is increased, and the intervention point is shifted toward the back. The number of times of the second predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance is reduced. By providing such a difference, it is possible to preferably prevent the production from becoming monotonous by dividing the first predetermined production group back and forth by the intervention of the second prescribed production.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the second setting mode is more likely to be set than the first setting mode when the determination result by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the grant correspondence result is obtained, the first predetermined effect is likely to continue in the second half of the game cycle, for example. Thus, according to the configuration in which the intervention position of the second predetermined effect is determined so as to correspond to the game result, while the first predetermined effect is divided into the first half and the latter half by the intervention of the second predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect Continuation of the predetermined effects→For example, the connection of the effect of the ready-to-win display is strengthened, and the original function of suggesting the degree of expectation by repeating the first predetermined effect can be favorably secured.

Feature C6. information display means (for example, an effect displayed on the display screen 253a) for displaying number-of-times correspondence information corresponding to the number of times the first predetermined effect continues;
and means for resetting the number-of-times corresponding information displayed on the information display means when the first predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to feature C5.

By displaying the information corresponding to the number of times when the first predetermined effect continues, it becomes easy to grasp how many times it is in succession even if there is an oversight or the like. In such a configuration, when the second predetermined effect intervenes, by resetting the number-of-times correspondence information, it is clearly indicated that the continuation of the first predetermined effect has stopped. As a result, it becomes clear that the second predetermined effect serves as an opportunity to stop the continuation of the first predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent the content from becoming difficult to understand due to the complication of the effect.

Feature C7. Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying a combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the grant determination after performing a variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen. ,
A gaming machine in which, when a result of determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
The effect execution means performs a display effect using a pattern displayed on the display screen,
In the first predetermined effect, the patterns are variably displayed on the display screen, and the patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen so as to form a pattern combination that does not correspond to the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by executing the first predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game, it is possible to make it appear as if the progress speed of the game has changed greatly. However, in such a configuration, the game may become monotonous because the first predetermined effect is repeated in a short cycle. Therefore, by allowing the first predetermined effect group to intervene with the second predetermined effect, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game. In particular, in a configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of grant correspondence, increases as the first predetermined effect continues, as shown in feature C1, the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect is a factor that confuses the player. It is not preferable because it becomes In this regard, the intervention of the second predetermined effect stops the continuation of the first predetermined effect, so that the occurrence of such a problem can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C8. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is that the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function of executing game turn control processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of main display unit 87) so that on the machine,
The game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for determining the operation period of the game round operation for each game round,
Effect executing means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification/effect control device 140 execute variable display control processing for executing effects in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed. function),
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a second 3 special performance) is provided, and when the first predetermined performance is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined performance, the degree of expectation as the transition correspondence result is suggested by the number of consecutive times. It is composed of
The production executing means is
When the first predetermined performance is executed a plurality of times during one game round, the second predetermined performance is interposed between the first predetermined performances so that the first predetermined performance is performed before the second predetermined performance. Means for dividing into a first predetermined effect to be executed and a first predetermined effect to be executed after the second predetermined effect;
and means for continuing the first predetermined performances by placing the second predetermined performances before or after the first predetermined performances when the first predetermined performances are executed a plurality of times during one game round. A gaming machine characterized in that

As shown in the feature C8, in the configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of the grant correspondence, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, the degree of expectation suggested by the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect and the actual game result. It is feared that the divergence will increase. Here, it is possible to simply set the configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed, but in such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect is not exhibited well. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is intervened to suppress an excessive increase in the number of continuations, the above divergence can be achieved while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the first predetermined effect can be exhibited favorably.

Feature C9. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of the main display unit 87) so that the on the machine,
The game round control means has a period determining means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for determining the operation period of the game round operation for each game round,
Effect execution means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification/effect control device 140 execute variable display control processing for executing effects in parallel with the game cycle motion when the game cycle motion is performed. function),
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a second 3 special performance) is provided, and when the first predetermined performance is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined performance, the degree of expectation as the transition correspondence result is suggested by the number of consecutive times. It is composed of
After executing the first predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game round, the effect executing means executes the second predetermined effect during the first predetermined effect, when executing the second predetermined effect in the game round. 2. A game machine characterized by having means for executing a predetermined effect.

As shown in the feature C9, in the configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of the grant correspondence, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, the degree of expectation suggested by the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect and the actual game result. It is feared that the divergence will increase. Here, it is possible to simply set the configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed, but in such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect is not exhibited well. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is intervened to suppress an excessive increase in the number of continuations, the above divergence can be achieved while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the first predetermined effect can be exhibited favorably.

Feature C10. As game states, a first game state and a second game state in which the action period of the game-turning action is shorter than that of the first game state are provided,
The first predetermined effect is a effect that is executed once in each game round in the second game state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game round is configured so that the first predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times,
The effect executing means is configured to execute the first predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game round when the game state is the first game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature C10, in the first game state, it is possible to make it appear as if the second game state has been reached by repeating the first predetermined effect during one game round. That is, it is possible to greatly change the rhythm of the progress of the game by making it appear as if the progress of the game has accelerated at once. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature C11. When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game round, the effect executing means performs the first predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. It divides into a first predetermined performance to be executed before the second predetermined performance and a first predetermined performance to be executed after the second predetermined performance, and the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance to be executed after the second predetermined performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized by having means.

As shown in the feature C1 and the like, in the configuration in which the first predetermined effect is continuously executed, the first predetermined effect is continued so as to straddle the previous and subsequent game rounds, so that the number of consecutive first predetermined effects is increased. can be excessive. For example, by considering the execution status of the first predetermined effect in the previous game round when determining the outline of the effect in the later game round, it is possible to suppress the number of consecutive first predetermined effects from becoming excessive. It is feared that a configuration in which the outline of the effect is always determined in consideration of the previous game round may increase the control load or increase the restrictions related to the determination of the outline of the effect. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first predetermined effect is divided into the second predetermined effect, it is possible to finish the effect of one game round with the second predetermined effect. Therefore, the influence on subsequent game rounds can be reduced, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably suppressed.

Note that, as shown in this feature, when the second predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game round, for example, the second predetermined effect other than the last second predetermined effect (the second predetermined effect) is executed. It is preferable that the second predetermined effect (first second predetermined effect) does not correspond to the grant correspondence result.

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature group A to the feature group B to the feature group C detailed above.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D below is defined as "Some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of game machine, for example, Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a win state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the structure of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature D1. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (function for executing processing such as winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
The game state is shifted to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means indicating that the transition correspondence result corresponds to the transition information. a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after performing variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen. and
A gaming machine in which, when the determination result by the determining means is the transition response result, a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transition to the special game state. There is
As a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D), which is one of the variable display modes of the pattern on the display screen,
Before the symbol combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined symbol combination and at least a part of the symbols are being variably displayed. A first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a certain reach state;
a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode;
When the result of determination by the determining means is the transition correspondence result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode, and the result of determination by the determining means is the transition response result. A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is not a correspondence result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the ready-to-win state changes according to the transition determination result. Thereby, the monotony of the game can be suppressed. In particular, in the case of the transition correspondence result, by positively delaying the transition timing to the ready-to-win state, it is possible to suitably earn the execution period of the performance, etc., that stirs expectations for the transition to the ready-to-win state. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game during the period before the transition to the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 performs the winning process for the operation opening function to be executed), acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the transition information. Determination means (function for executing lottery processing by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for determining whether the Based on that, the game state transition means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes the game state transition process) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than normal function), a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after performing a variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the patterns correspond to the judgment result by the judgment means. Display control means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410) for stop-displaying the combined combination, and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the special game state is entered. A gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stop-displayed on the display screen before the transition to , wherein a special variable display mode (e.g., As super reach D), before the symbol combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined symbol combination and at least a part of the symbol combination. A first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a ready-to-reach state in which a pattern is being variably displayed, and a second special variable display mode (long) that shifts to the ready-to-reach state later than the first special variable display mode. is provided, and when the determination result by the determination means is the result of the transition response, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than when the result is not the transition response result, and the A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination result by the determination means is not the result of transition correspondence, it is easier to set the second special variable display mode than when it is the result of transition correspondence." It is also possible to

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operation opening by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162). and acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information. Determination means (function for executing lottery processing by MPU 402 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not, and the result of determination by the determination means is a transition correspondence result indicating that it corresponds to the transition information. Based on this, game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by MPU 402 of main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than normal, and display A display unit (symbol display device 253) having a screen (display screen 253a), and after performing variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the patterns are stopped in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. Display control means for displaying (information / production control device 140 and display control device 410) is provided, and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition corresponding result, before transition to the special game state A gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the result of transition correspondence is statically displayed on the display screen, wherein the special variable display mode, which is one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, corresponds to the determination result. Before the stop display of the combination of symbols to be executed, the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen form a part of the predetermined combination of symbols and at least a part of the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode, and the variable display means means for setting the variable display mode of the pattern to the first special variable display mode when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result; and the determination result by the determination means is not the transition response result. and means for setting the variable display mode of the pattern to the second special variable display mode.".

Feature D2. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (function for executing processing such as winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162);
The game state is changed to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the result of determination by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after performing variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen. and
A gaming machine in which, when the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transition to the special game state. There is
As a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) of the pattern executed on the display screen,
Before the symbol combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined symbol combination and at least part of the symbols are being variably displayed. A first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a certain reach state;
a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode;
A first setting mode (normal effect mode) and a second setting mode (special effect mode) are provided as setting modes of the variable display mode in the normal game state,
In the first setting mode, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode when the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result. ,
In the second setting mode, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode when the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result. A gaming machine characterized by:

When the pattern is variably displayed in the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the ready-to-win state changes according to the result of the transition and the set mode. Thereby, the monotony of the game can be suppressed. In particular, in the first setting mode, when the transition response result is obtained, the timing of transition to the ready-to-win state is likely to be earlier. In the setting mode, when it is a transition correspondence result, the transition timing to the ready-to-win state is likely to be delayed, so that an execution period such as a performance to encourage the transition to the ready-to-win state can be favorably earned. As a result, it is possible to contribute to an increase in attention to the game during both the period during the ready-to-reach state and the period before the transition to the ready-to-reach state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 performs the winning process for the operation opening function to be executed), acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the transition information. Judgment means for judging whether or not (a function of executing processing such as winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) and the result of judgment by the judgment means correspond to the transition information Based on the transition corresponding result, game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (game state by MPU 402 of main controller 162) a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a); Display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) that stop and display in a combination corresponding to the determination result by, When the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, A gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stop-displayed on the display screen before transition to the special game state, wherein a special variable display mode of the patterns executed on the display screen ( For example, as super reach D), before the symbol combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined symbol combination and at least a part of the symbol combination. A first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a ready-to-reach state in which the pattern is being variably displayed, and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the ready-to-reach state is later than the first special variable display mode. ) is provided, and a normal setting mode (normal effect mode) and a special setting mode (special effect mode) are provided as setting modes of the variable display mode in the normal game state, and in the special setting mode is a game characterized in that the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result. Machine." is also possible.

Feature D3. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, the first special effect) are configured so that the execution period is a predetermined period until the ready-to-reach state is reached. is configured to be executable twice, and when the predetermined effect is continuously performed, the number of times of execution suggests the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result,
The second special variable display mode is characterized in that a period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the reach state is longer than that in the first special variable display mode. The gaming machine according to D1 or feature D2.

According to feature D3, in the second special variable display mode, the period from the start of the variable display to the shift to the ready-to-reach state is longer than in the first special variable display mode. That is, in the case of the transition response result, the transition to the ready-to-win state is delayed, so that it is possible to increase the chances of executing the predetermined effect during the period.

Feature D4. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured such that a period until the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed is the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

If the period is set to be the same and the transition timing to the ready-to-win state is set to be different, the effect shown in feature D1 and the like can be exhibited while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine.

Feature D5. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured so that a predetermined effect configured to have a predetermined execution period can be executed a plurality of times until the ready-to-reach state is reached. is configured, and when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the number of times of execution indicates the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result,
The difference between the timing of shifting to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the timing of shifting to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that:

As shown in feature D5, if the difference in transition timing is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period, the predetermined effect can be executed more by the integral multiple. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of excess or deficiency in the performance execution time due to the difference in the number of executions of the predetermined presentation, that is, the occurrence of distortion in the flow of presentation in any special display mode. As a result, the smoothness of the performance progress can be ensured.

Feature D6. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, the first special effect) are configured so that the execution period is a predetermined period until the ready-to-reach state is reached. is configured to be executable twice, and when the predetermined effect is continuously performed, the number of times of execution suggests the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result,
an upper limit determining means for determining an upper limit of the number of consecutive executions of the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the determining means;
The upper limit determining means is configured such that, when the result of determination by the determining means is the transition response result, the upper limit is more likely to be higher than when the transition result is not the transition response result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

As shown in feature D6, when the number of consecutive executions of the predetermined effect suggests the degree of expectation of the transition response result, if the period until transition to the ready-to-win state is shortened, the period will substantially reduce Consecutive times are limited. In this case, even if it is desired to continue the predetermined effect to the maximum limit, there is a concern that the execution opportunity will be lost. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature D1 and the like to such a configuration, the above-described substantial restrictions can be relaxed.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to C to the feature group D detailed above.

<Characteristic group E>
The characteristic group E below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the structure of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Features E1. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation port in the main controller 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (win/fail information). function) and
A special game state (execution of opening and closing) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is changed based on the transition correspondence result (hit result) indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. mode), a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Variable display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after performing variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen. and
When the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result, the gaming machine stops displaying a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition response result on the display screen before transitioning to the special game state. and
As a variable display mode of the pattern executed on the display screen when the game state is the predetermined game state, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination. and a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) is provided in which at least a part of the pattern is displayed in a variable state,
A related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) that stores information about the variable display mode of the previous game round,
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, transition timing determination means (notification/effect control A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of determining the transition timing to the ready-to-win display by the MPU 442 of the device 140.

According to the feature E1, in the game round corresponding to the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the ready-to-win state is determined according to the variable display mode in the previous game round. In this way, by coordinating the previous game round and the current game round, it is possible to realize the diversification of the presentation modes. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. In the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the execution period is a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the ready-to-win state is reached, When the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the number of executions indicates the degree of expectation, which is the result of the transition, and
The transition timing determining means determines when the variable display in the previous game round has ended with the predetermined effect and when the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode in the current game round. , The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the timing of transition to the reach state is determined based on the information stored in the related information storage means.

Depending on the execution period of the game round, for example, it may be difficult to earn the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect in the current game round alone. In a configuration in which the expectation level, which is the result of transition correspondence, is suggested by the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect, the relationship between the consecutive number of times and the expectation level is likely to collapse due to such a strong restriction. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the previous game round ends with a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round is diverted to the current game round. be able to. That is, by determining the transition timing to the ready-to-win state in accordance with the previous game round, it is possible to suitably suppress the excess or deficiency of the number of consecutive times. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the function of suggesting the degree of expectation through the continuation of the predetermined presentation.

Feature E3. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing winning processing for the operation port in the main controller 162);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (win/fail information). function) and
A special game state (execution of opening and closing) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is changed based on the transition correspondence result (hit result) indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. mode), a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Variable display means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after performing variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen. and
When the result of determination by the determination means is the transition response result, the gaming machine stops displaying a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition response result on the display screen before transitioning to the special game state. and
As a variable display mode of the pattern executed on the display screen when the game state is the predetermined game state, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination. and a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) is provided in which at least a part of the pattern is displayed in a variable state,
In the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect configured to have a predetermined execution period can be executed a plurality of times until the ready-to-win state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously performed. When executed, the number of executions is configured to indicate the degree of expectation, which is the result of the migration response,
A related information storage means (continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) that stores information about the execution status of the predetermined effect in the previous game round;
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, transition timing determination means (notification/effect control A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of determining the transition timing to the ready-to-win display by the MPU 442 of the device 140.

Depending on the execution period of the game round, for example, it may be difficult to earn the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect in the current game round alone. In a configuration in which the expectation level, which is the result of transition correspondence, is suggested by the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect, the relationship between the consecutive number of times and the expectation level is likely to collapse due to such a strong constraint. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, by determining the timing of transition to the reach state in the current game round in consideration of the execution status of the predetermined effect in the previous game round, for example, execution in the previous game round It is possible to divert the given performance to the current game round. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the excess or deficiency of the number of consecutive times, and to effectively exhibit the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by the continuation of the predetermined effect.

Feature E4. continuous number specifying means for specifying the number of times the predetermined effect is continuously executed until the start of the current game round when the previous game round ends with the predetermined effect;
setting means for setting the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect in the current game round based on the determination result by the determination means;
The transition timing determining means determines the transition timing in the current game round based on the number of times specified by the consecutive number specifying means and the number of consecutive times set by the setting means. Or the gaming machine according to feature E3.

According to the configuration shown in feature E4, when the predetermined effect continues until the start of the current game round, the transition timing to the ready-to-win state is determined based on the number of consecutive times and the set number of times in the current game round. be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably exhibit the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by continuing the predetermined effect.

In addition, "continuous" shown in this feature indicates a case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed without intervening another effect different from the predetermined effect.

Feature E5. A regulating means for regulating determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determination means when an interval period from the end of the previous game round to the start of the current game round exceeds a reference period (for example, 2 sec). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that

In order to coordinate with the previous game round, determining the transition timing considering the previous game round in a situation where the interval period is excessively large is a factor that causes discomfort in the above cooperation. can be. Therefore, by setting a reference period as a criterion for determining whether or not cooperation is possible, and refraining from unreasonable cooperation when the actual interval period exceeds this reference period, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature E6. Characteristic features E1 through E1, characterized in that, when the previous game round is a game round corresponding to the transition to the ready-to-win state, a regulation means is provided for regulating the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5.

When the state is shifted to the ready-to-win state in the previous game round, the end of the game round becomes clear because the result of the current transition determination is displayed along with the end of the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness due to unreasonable cooperation by setting the configuration so as not to perform cooperation with the previous game round.

Feature E7. In the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect configured to have a predetermined execution period can be executed a plurality of times until the ready-to-win state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously performed. When executed, the number of executions is configured to indicate the degree of expectation, which is the result of the migration response,
The transition timing determination means is configured to select one of a plurality of transition timing candidates, and the transition timings are defined so that the timing difference is an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by:

When adjusting the number of executions of the predetermined effect, by setting the difference in transition timing to an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined effect as described above, excess or deficiency occurs in the effect period when adjusting the number of executions of the predetermined effect. can be suitably suppressed.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature group A to feature group D to the feature group E described in detail above.

<Feature group F>
The following feature group F is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the construction of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature F1. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. In a gaming machine provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that
The game round control means is a period determining means (main controller 162) for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game round. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
An effect executing means (symbol display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed,
As one of the effects, there is provided a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means performs the predetermined effect during one game round. Having a continuous execution means for continuously executing the production,
The continuous execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect executed at the end of a game round so as to extend over the operation period and the maintenance period in the game round.

According to the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeated in game rounds, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game is progressing at a good tempo. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, if the maintenance period of the notification result corresponding to the result of provision determination becomes extremely short, it is assumed that there is a high possibility that the notification result will be overlooked. On the other hand, if the maintenance period is simply lengthened, the predetermined effect, which is repeated at a good tempo, stops between game rounds, which may hinder the above effect of increasing attention.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game round is executed so as to straddle the operation period and the maintenance period of the game round, so that the predetermined effect is executed in the next game round. The blank before resuming can be made smaller. As a result, even if the retention period of the notification result is set to be long to some extent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the operation period is not divisible by the execution period of the predetermined effect.

To easily realize a structure in which a predetermined performance executed at the end of a game round straddles an operation period and a maintenance period by making the execution period of the predetermined performance and the operation period of the operation for the game round have a non-integer multiple relationship. be able to.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the maintenance period is longer than the remainder obtained by dividing the operation period by the execution period of the predetermined effect.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when game rounds are continuously executed, it is possible to avoid the predetermined effect executed at the end of the previous game round from extending to the next game round. Avoiding interference with the next game round is preferable in terms of ensuring the relationship between the game round action and the performance parallel thereto.

Feature F4. As game states, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game-turning operation is shorter than the first game state The normal game state) is provided,
The predetermined effect is a effect that is executed once in one game round in the second game state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game round is configured so that the predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times,
Any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game round when the first game state is established. 1. The game machine described in 1.

According to the feature F4, in the first game state, it is possible to make it appear as if the game is in the second game state by repeating the predetermined effect during one game round. That is, it is possible to greatly change the rhythm of the progress of the game by making it appear as if the progress of the game has accelerated at once. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game can be exhibited more favorably. By applying the technical ideas shown in the feature F1 and the like to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference between the first game state and the second game state from becoming conspicuous.

Feature F5. a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the display control means (notification / production control device 140 and display control device) that finally stops and displays the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the grant determination means 410) and
When the predetermined performance is executed at the end of the game round, the patterns are variably displayed on the display screen so that the patterns are displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result, and the final effect is displayed on the display screen. In the case of not being executed at the end of the game cycle, the patterns are variably displayed on the display screen to form a pattern combination that does not correspond to the grant correspondence result. It is configured to display a temporary stop on the display screen so that
Features F1 to F4, characterized in that a temporary stop display period during which the temporary stop display is executed and a final stop display period during which the final stop display is executed are shorter than the sustain period. The game machine according to any one of.

By repeating a predetermined effect (variable display of patterns→temporary stop display), it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing one after another. Since the blank between the predetermined performances that occurs at the end of the game round can be reduced, the break when the predetermined performance is restarted in the next game round can be made inconspicuous.

Feature F6. As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game-turning operation is shorter than the first game state of the normal game state) is provided,
The predetermined effect is a effect that is executed once in one game round in the second game state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game round is configured so that the predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times,
The effect execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game round when the first game state is established,
The second maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the second game state, is configured to be shorter than the first maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the first game state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein a temporary stop display period during which the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect has the same length as the second sustain period.

By setting the temporary stop display period to the same length as the second sustain period as shown in this feature, the above-described mimicry effect can be made more suitable. However, with such a configuration, the difference between the temporary stop display period and the first sustain period tends to be noticeable. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in the feature F1 and the like to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference between the first game state and the second game state from being easily identified from the presentation mode.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to E to the feature group F described in detail above.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature group G below is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the structure of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature G1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is that the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function of executing game turn control processing by MPU 402 of main control device 162) for controlling predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of main display unit 87) so that on the machine,
The game round control means is a period determination means (main controller 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game round. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
An effect executing means (symbol display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed,
The effect execution means includes a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after performing a variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the patterns are determined by the provision determination means. It has a variable display means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410) that displays the final stop in a combination corresponding to the result,
As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game-turning operation is shorter than the first game state of the normal game state) is provided,
A normal effect mode and a special effect mode are provided as effect modes of the effect execution means in the first game state,
In the normal effect mode, the display of the pattern on the display screen shifts to the first stop display before the end timing of the game cycle motion, and the first stop display is performed at the same timing as the end timing of the game cycle motion. It is configured to shift from the display to the final stop display,
In the special effect mode, the first stop display is regulated, and the display of the pattern on the display screen shifts to the final stop display at the same timing as the end timing of the game cycle operation. A game machine characterized by

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first game state in which the progress speed is relatively slow, by shifting from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode, the preceding stop display that has been executed up to that time is avoided, and the preceding stop is avoided. The final stop display is executed without going through the display. This makes it appear as if the period during which the notification result is maintained has been shortened. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the progress speed of the game is artificially changed without shortening the period for maintaining the notification result by the predetermined notification means, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. can contribute to

It should be noted that "transition from the first stop display to the final stop display" shown in the present feature includes a configuration of shifting to the final stop display with the pattern combination displayed by the first stop display.

Feature G2. Characteristic feature G1, characterized in that the maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal effect mode and the special effect mode in the first game state. game machine.

In order to differentiate between the normal effect mode and the special effect mode by using the temporary stop display→final stop display that is executed in a series as shown in the feature G1, the maintenance period is maintained in both effect modes. are common, the difference in advancing speed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complication of the basic operation of the game machine related to the game cycle control means and to make it appear as if there is a difference in the progress speed of the game.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the maintenance period determined by the period determining means is the same in the first game state and the second game state. .

For example, when a difference is provided in the operation period and the maintenance period in each game state, by performing the variable display→stop display of the pattern accordingly, the above-described difference in progress speed can be clarified and the sharpness can be emphasized. However, considering that the maintenance period is a period for informing the player of the award determination result, it is not preferable to make the maintenance period extremely short in order to increase such a difference, and the maintenance period An extremely long time is not preferable because it gives the player the impression that the game is being delayed unnecessarily. Therefore, it is practically difficult to increase the difference. In this regard, if the maintenance period is set to be the same regardless of the game state and a difference is generated by the first stop display shown in feature G1, such a restriction can be preferably relaxed.

Feature G4. The preceding stop display is configured such that the chances of stop-displaying the same pattern combination as the final stop-display are greater than the chances of stop-displaying the picture combination different from the final stop-display. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

As shown in the feature G1, etc., in a configuration in which the stop display period is shown to be long by the sequence of the first stop display to the final stop display, the above feature stands out because the first stop display is only temporary. The effect shown in G1 will not be exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by mainly using a pattern that leads directly from the first stop display to the final stop display, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first stop display is part of the final stop display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the period during which the preceding stop display is performed is the same as or shorter than the period during which the final stop display is performed. .

When the first stop display is changed to the final stop display, the excessively long first stop display period makes the deviation from the operation of the predetermined notification means more noticeable. There is concern that this may give the player the impression that the game is being delayed unnecessarily. Therefore, in the case of first stop display→final stop display, by restricting the first stop display period to be equal to or less than the final stop display period, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Feature G6. The maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal effect mode and the special effect mode in the first game state,
A predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided as one of the effects performed by the effect execution means in parallel with the game cycle operation. cage,
When the special effect mode is set, the effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a plurality of times during a period from when the game-playing motion is started to when the game-playing motion is finished. having means for displaying the plurality of patterns in a final stop in accordance with the end of the reusable action;
The predetermined effect includes a configuration in which the plurality of patterns displayed on the display screen are temporarily stopped after being variably displayed,
Any one of features G1 to G5, wherein a temporary stop display period when the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect is configured to have the same length as the sustain period. The gaming machine described in .

In order to make it appear that the game progresses faster by repeating the variable display of the pattern and the temporary stop display in the special effect mode, it is not preferable that there is a difference between the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period. This is because the conspicuous difference between the temporary stop display and the final stop display serves as an opportunity to ascertain the end timing of the game cycle. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the provisional stop display period and the final stop display period are configured to coincide, even if the game cycle moves to the next game cycle while the predetermined effect is repeated, the temporary stop display period is set to be the same. It becomes difficult to understand the difference between the display and the final stop display, and it becomes difficult to specify the boundary between game rounds. Therefore, the function of artificially generating a change in traveling speed can be preferably exhibited.

Feature G7. The predetermined effect is the same effect as the effect executed in the game round in the second game state, and its execution period has the same length as the sum of the operation period and the maintenance period in the second game state. The gaming machine according to feature G6, which is configured as follows.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the special effect mode during the first game state, it is possible to make it appear as if the game has shifted to the second game state. Here, according to the combination with the feature G6, both the temporary stop display and the final stop display in the special effect mode have the same appearance as the final stop display in the second game state, so that the above-mentioned mimicry effect is favorably obtained. can be demonstrated.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to F to the feature group G described in detail above.

<Characteristic group H>
The following characteristic group H is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the structure of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Feature H1. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (main control unit) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result (jackpot result) corresponding to granting the privilege to the player. a function of executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the device 162;
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display portion for operation opening of the main display unit 87) so that the on the machine,
The game round control means includes a period determining means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162). has
Effect executing means (symbol display device 253 and MPU 442 of notification/effect control device 140) for executing a predetermined effect (for example, first special effect) in parallel with the game cycle operation when the game cycle operation is performed. function to execute variable display control processing in
As the predetermined effects, there are provided a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect executing means performs the first predetermined effect during the operation period. It is configured to be executed repeatedly,
The first predetermined effect is configured to suggest the degree of expectation, which is the result of the given response, by the number of times the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined effect,
information about the operation period when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination, at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination; a destination identification means to identify in
The execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determining means and the information specified by the destination specifying means. and an execution mode determination means for determining the execution mode.

In the configuration shown in feature H1, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects. Here, when the first predetermined effect is to be continued in the subsequent game round alone, the number of times the first predetermined effect is continued is influenced by the operation period of the subsequent game round. For this reason, an event may occur in which the actual number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect is less than the preferable number of times even though the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect should be set to be large. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when determining the execution mode (number of times and arrangement) of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round, the operation period of the subsequent game round is taken into consideration. be. As a result, for example, when it is unlikely that the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect can be sufficiently ensured in the subsequent game round alone, the first predetermined effect is started in advance in the current game round, so that the subsequent game round can It is possible to make up for the shortage in game rounds. In addition, when the number of consecutive first predetermined effects in the current game round is likely to be excessive by taking over the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, by suppressing the continuation of the first predetermined effects in the current game round. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature H2. The destination identifying means stores information about a grant determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination, and determines that the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. It has a function to specify at the timing before becoming,
The execution mode determining means specifies the number of times the first predetermined effect can be continuously executed from the information specified by the destination specifying means, and based on the specified result and the operation period in the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined.

As shown in the feature H2, by specifying in advance the grant determination result and the information of the operation period for the subsequent game round, the consecutive number of times of the first predetermined effect suitable for the subsequent game round can be grasped. Based on this, the function shown in the characteristic H1 can be exhibited more preferably by determining the effect mode in the current game round.

Feature H3. Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the display control means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410) stops and displays the patterns so that the patterns are combined in accordance with the determination result. ) and
A gaming machine in which, when a result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined pattern combination, and at least some of the patterns are being variably displayed. A special variable display mode that shifts to a certain reach state is provided,
When the current game round corresponds to the special variable display mode, the determination of the execution mode based on the information specified by the destination specifying means is regulated for the execution mode determination means. A gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

As shown in the feature H3, when the current game round corresponds to the transition to the ready-to-win state, by setting the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in accordance with the later game round, Restrictions on performance in game rounds are increased. It is feared that this will lead to obsolescence of the production in this game round. Therefore, in such a case, a configuration that is practically preferable can be realized by determining the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect without considering the subsequent game rounds.

Feature H4. Display means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the display control means (notification/production control device 140 and display control device 410) stop and display the patterns so as to form a pattern combination corresponding to the determination result. ) and
A gaming machine in which, when a result of grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined pattern combination, and at least some of the patterns are being variably displayed. A special variable display mode that shifts to a certain reach state is provided,
When the game round to be specified ahead corresponds to the special variable display mode, the destination specifying means relates to the period until transition to the ready-to-win state in the operation period in the game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that it is configured to specify information.

If the subsequent game cycle corresponds to the special variable display mode (reach), the period during which the predetermined effect can be executed is greatly restricted. That is, the period during which the predetermined effect can be executed is limited to the period before transition to the ready-to-win state. Therefore, when performing cooperation with the current game round as shown in the feature H1, by specifying information regarding the period until the transition to the reach state in the next game round, the cooperation of the game round is preferable. can be

Feature H5. The execution mode determining means, when the subsequent game round corresponds to the special variable display mode, determines the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determining means and the information specified by the previous specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on.

As shown in feature H4, when the later game round corresponds to the special variable display mode (ready-to-win), the operation period of the current game round and the transition to the ready-to-win state in the later game round. By determining the mode of execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round in consideration of the period, the technical idea shown in the feature H4 can be suitably embodied.

Feature H6. When the execution mode determination means determines the execution mode in the current game round, if the subsequent game round is considered, the execution mode determination means determines the first predetermined effect and the second effect in the current game round. Characteristic feature H4 or characteristic feature H5 characterized in that when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is determined, the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the subsequent game round is determined together. The gaming machine described in .

In the case of coordinating the current game round with the subsequent game round, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the execution mode of the subsequent game round is also determined when the execution mode of the current game round is determined. . By regulating the modification of the execution mode in the subsequent game round in this manner, it is possible to prevent the current game round from failing to exhibit the support function in the subsequent game round.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to G to the feature group H detailed above.

<Characteristic group I>
The following characteristic group I is defined as "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a Triggered by the winning of a prize in the operation opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of the pattern is started. , a specific pattern combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement in terms of the structure of the game machine in order to increase the level of attention paid to the game." is.

Features I1. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. In a gaming machine provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that
The game round control means includes a period determining means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162). has
An effect executing means (symbol display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, first special effect to third special effect) is provided so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means is one game. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect multiple times during the game,
A frequency information storage means (a game frequency counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/effect control device 140) for storing frequency information corresponding to the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, which is information updated with the execution of the predetermined effect; ,
Means for executing a predetermined game process when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of switching between

For the predetermined effect shown in feature I1, the effect execution period is set to be shorter than the operation period of the action for the game round, and is configured to be executed multiple times during the game round. According to the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeated at a pitch shorter than the game round, the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is faster than, for example, when the predetermined game process is executed triggered by the progress of the game round. It is possible to give an impression to the player as if it is, and further contribute to the diversification of the timing. As a result, it is possible to realize diversification of game presentations and the like, and contribute to an increase in attention to games.

Feature I2. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. In a gaming machine provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that
The game round control means is a period determining means (main controller 162) for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game round. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
An effect executing means (symbol display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, first special effect to third special effect) is provided so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means is one game. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect multiple times during the game,
a frequency information storage means for storing frequency information corresponding to the number of times the predetermined effect has been executed;
The number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means is information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) that is greater than the maximum number of times (for example, 7 times) that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game round. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing a predetermined game process based on the event (a function of switching the performance mode by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140).

For the predetermined effect shown in feature I1, the effect execution period is set to be shorter than the operation period of the action for the game round, and is configured to be executed multiple times during the game round. By repeating a predetermined effect at a pitch shorter than the game time, the number information is updated, and when the predetermined effect is repeated over a plurality of game times, the predetermined game is played when the number of times reaches the predetermined number. Processing will be executed. According to such a configuration, the game gives the impression that the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is faster than the case where the predetermined game process is executed with the progress of the game round as a trigger, for example. It can be given to people, and it can also contribute to the diversification of the timing.

It should be noted that the number of times stored in the number information storage means shown in this feature reaches a predetermined number of times that is greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game round. means for executing a process." is changed to "executing a predetermined game process based on the number of times stored in the number-of-times storage means reaching a predetermined number of times. and wherein the predetermined number of times is larger than the maximum number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game round." It is possible.

Feature I3. Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing winning processing for the operation port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162);
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. function to execute processing such as winning lottery) and
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. In a gaming machine provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that
The game round control means is a period determining means (main controller 162) for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) for maintaining the notification result for each game round. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
An effect executing means (symbol display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is performed,
As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the first game state The normal game state) is provided,
The production executing means is
a first execution means for executing a first effect configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period in the first game state, a plurality of times in game rounds in the first game state;
a second execution means for executing a second effect whose effect execution period is the same as the operation period in the second game state once in a game round in the second game state;
a first storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the first effect has been executed;
a second storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the second effect has been executed;
a process executing means for executing a predetermined game process when the information stored in the first storage means or the second storage means becomes information corresponding to predetermined reference information; Characteristic game machine.

In the first game state in which the progress speed of the game is slower than in the second game state, the first effect is repeatedly executed during one game cycle, and the number of executions of the first effect reaches the reference number of times (reference information). , a predetermined game process is executed. The pseudo game progress speed in the first game state can be brought close to that in the second game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing quickly even in the first game state, which is originally slow in progress, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game in the first game state. can contribute.

Feature I4. Effect data storage means for storing effect data of the effect executed by the effect execution means,
The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein both the first effect and the second effect are effects executed using predetermined effect data stored in the effect data storage means.

The same effect as the second effect executed in the second game state in which the game progresses at a fast speed is reproduced in the first game state, and it is as if the first game state has shifted to the second game state. You can make it look like This can contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to set the configuration shown in this feature as "the gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized in that the first effect is the same effect as the second effect."

Feature I5. A first effect setting mode and a second effect setting mode are provided as effect setting modes of the effect executing means in the first game state,
The first execution means is configured to execute the first effect a plurality of times in game rounds in the second effect setting mode when the second effect setting mode is set in the first game state. The game machine according to feature I3 or feature I4, characterized in that

According to the feature I5, the first effect setting mode / second effect setting mode is switched during the first game state, and by shifting to the second effect mode, the game is played in the same way as the second game state. You can make it look like progress is accelerating.

Feature I6. The processing execution means changes the effect setting mode from the second effect setting mode to the first effect setting when the information stored in the first storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, characterized in that it is configured to shift to a mode.

According to the feature I6, when the first effect executed in the second effect setting mode reaches the reference number of times, the effect setting mode is switched to the first effect setting mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to strengthen the sharpness of the progress of the game.

Feature I7. The processing executing means is configured to set the effect setting mode to the first effect setting mode when the information stored in the second storage means is information corresponding to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that:

According to the feature I7, the behavior in the second effect setting mode in the first game state can be brought close to the behavior in the second game state, and it is as if the second game state was entered during the first game state. You can enhance the fake other effect you see.

Feature I8. comprising reference information setting means for setting the predetermined reference information;
The reference information setting means has means for setting the same information in the first game state as the predetermined reference information set in the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7.

According to the feature I8, the behavior in the case of the second game state→the first effect mode and the case of the first game state (the second effect mode)→the first effect mode can be made closer. This is preferable in order to enhance the mimicry effect of making it look as if the second game state has been entered during the first game state.

It is also possible to apply each technical idea shown in the feature group A to the feature group H to the feature group I described in detail above.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball passage (guidance passage 103) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (game nail 38, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE). A game machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a passing part (general prize winning port 81, etc.).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game area formation body, 82... Variable prize winning device, 83a... Upper operation opening, 83b... Lower operation opening, 87... Main display unit, 91... Electric role Thing 140... Notification/effect control device 162... Main control device 253... Symbol display device 253a... Display screen 402... MPU 403... ROM 404... RAM 410... Display control device 442... MPU 443 ... ROM, 444 ... RAM, ME ... variable display area, PE ... game area, SE ... reduced display area.

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
It is assumed that one game cycle is when the game cycle motion is terminated by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game cycle motion is started. In a game machine comprising a game turn control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that
The game round control means has period determination means for determining an operation period of the game round motion for each game round,
an effect executing means for executing an effect in parallel with the game-playing motion when the game-playing motion is being performed;
A first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period are provided as effects executed by the effect execution means,
There is provided an upper limit number of times corresponding to the determination result by the grant determination means for the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed during one game round,
When the first predetermined effect is executed for at least the upper limit number of times, the effect executing means intervenes the second predetermined effect to perform the first predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect to be executed before the second predetermined effect. A game machine characterized by having a means capable of making a player separately recognize the first predetermined effect to be executed after the second predetermined effect .

Images